+ All Categories
Home > Documents > FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32...

FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32...

Date post: 18-Mar-2021
Category:
Upload: others
View: 2 times
Download: 0 times
Share this document with a friend
198
FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY PROJECT MANUAL VOLUME III MAY 8, 2018
Transcript
Page 1: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY

PROJECT MANUAL

VOLUME III

MAY 8, 2018

Page 2: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

First Bank Project No. A17012

Hattiesburg, MS May 08, 2018

DOCUMENT 000001 – TABLE OF CONTENTS

Division Section Title

DIVISION 00 – PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS

A201-2007 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION

000101 PROJECT TITLE PAGE

000115 LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS

003119 EXISTING CONDITION INFORMATION

003132 GEOTECHNICAL DATA

DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 011000 SUMMARY

012500 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

012500 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM

014000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

014200 REFERENCES

015000 TEMP FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

016000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

017300 EXECUTION

017419 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

017700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

017823 OPERATION AND MAINTENENACE DATA

DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS

NOT USED

DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE

033000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

034500 PRECAST ARTHITECTURAL CONCRETE

DIVISION 04 - MASONRY

042000 UNIT MASONRY

DIVISION 05 – METALS

051200 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

053100 STEEL DECKING

054000 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING

055000 METAL FABRICATIONS

055113 METAL PAN STAIRS

055213 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS

057313 GLAZED DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS

DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES

061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY

064116 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS

066100 SHEATHING

Page 3: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

071326 SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING

071700 BENTONITE WATERPROOFING

071900 WATER REPELLENTS

072100 THERMAL INSULATION

072419 WATER-DRAINAGE EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS)

074245 FIBER CEMENT WALL PANELS

075323 ETHLYENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING

076200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

077100 ROOF SPECIALTIES

077200 ROOF HATCH

079200 JOINT SEALANTS

DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS

081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

081116 ALUMINUM THERMAL FLUSH DOORS AND FRAMES

081416 FLUSH WOOD DOORS

083313 COILING COUNTER DOORS

084113 ALUMINUM FRAMED STOREFRONT AND ENTRANCES

084413 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALL

087100 DOOR HARDWARE

088000 GLAZING

DIVISION 09 - FINISHES

092113 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES 092216 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092900 GYPSUM BOARD

093000 TILING

095113 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

095126 WOOD PANEL CEILINGS

096513 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES

096519 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING

096525 LUXURY VINYL TILE

096813 TILE CARPETING

099123 PAINTING

DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES

102113 PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS

102226 OPERABLE PARTITION

102800 TOILET, BATH & LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES

104116 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

105300 PRE-FAB METAL CANOPIES

DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT

NOT USED

DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS

124813 ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES

Page 4: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

NOT USED

DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT

142400 HYDRAULIC ELEVATOR

DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING

221113 PLUMBING

221113.1 FIRE PROTECTION

DIVISION 23 – HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING

233713 MECHANICAL

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL

260500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL

260519 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

260529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

260533 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

260553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

260923 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

262416 PANELBOARDS

262726 WIRING DEVICES

262816 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

265100 INTERIOR LIGHTING

265900 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK

311000 SITE CLEARING

312000 EARTH MOVING

313116 TERMITE CONTROL

DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

321216 ASPHALT PAVING

321313 CONCRETE PAVING

321373 PAVING JOINT SEALANTS

321723 PAVEMENT MARKINGS

321726 TACTILE WARNING SURFACING

329113 SOIL PREPARATION

329200 TURF AND GRASSES

341713 VEHICLE BARRIERS

DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES

330500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page 5: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 221113 - 1 PLUMBING

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

SECTION 221113

PLUMBING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Plumbing work and equipment

B. Related sections

1. Division 2

2. 233713 Mechanical

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. The General Conditions and all Contract Requirements shall apply with equal force to all portions of the work and become a part of the Contract.

B. Workmen especially trained in each branch of the work or trade shall be employed for the careful execution of this Contract in all of its phases. Workmanship shall be first class in all respects and meet the approval of the Architect. Any work poorly done must be removed and replaced at once upon condemnation.

C. All plumbing work shall be performed under the supervision of a Registered Master Plumber.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Where the words, "This Contractor", or P.C., are used in these Specifications, they shall mean the Plumbing Contractor.

B. Any item referred to in the singular number shall include as many of the item required for a complete system.

C. The term "provide, shall mean "furnish and install ready for intended use."

1.04 FEES, PERMITS, CODES

A. This Contractor shall give all requisite notices, obtain and pay for all permits, deposits and fees necessary for the installation of the work under these Specifications. Two copies of certificates of approval shall be obtained from any department issuing same and shall be turned over to the Owner prior to final acceptance of the work.

Page 6: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 221113 - 2 PLUMBING

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

B. Nothing contained in these Specifications or shown on the Drawings shall be construed to conflict with any State or Local Laws, Ordinances, Rules and Regulations; and the work of the Contractor shall comply with the above. Where any part of the work specified or shown on the Drawings, is not in accordance with all applicable Laws, Ordinances, Regulations and Codes, this Contractor shall make all changes required by the enforcing Authorities. All such Changes shall be made in a manner approved by the Architect and shall be made without any further cost to the Owner.

1.05 SCOPE OF WORK

A. These Specifications and accompanying Drawings are intended to cover the furnishing of all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary for the construction of Plumbing Systems. Small items of material, equipment and appurtenances not mentioned in detail or shown on the Drawings, but necessary for complete and operational systems, shall be furnished and installed by this Contractor without additional charge to the Owner and shall be included under this Contract. The following work shall be included as the Base Bid:

1. Visit the site and verify all conditions.

2. Complete all required applications, obtain all required plumbing permits and pay all fees for all Authorities Having Jurisdiction.

3. Plumbing work per Plumbing Drawings, and Specifications.

3. Provide a new drain, waste and vent system with all required piping and fittings, as shown on drawings and connect to existing sanitary sewer (field verify location prior to bidding).

4. Provide a new water distribution system with all required cold and hot water piping, valves and fittings and connect to existing (field verify location prior to bidding).

5. Insulate and label all new cold and hot water piping.

6. Provide cutting and patching of all openings required for plumbing.

7. Plumbing fixtures, equipment, floor drains, cleanouts, etc., required for complete systems shall be provided as specified.

8. Provide a water heater and trim.

9. Provide an oil tector sump pump w/ associated controls, piping, alarms, etc. for elevator as shown on drawings.

10. Perform all work in accordance with the latest standards of:

a) NEC b) OSHA

Page 7: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 221113 - 3 PLUMBING

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

c) NFPA d) ASPE e) Americans With Disabilities Act of 1990 f) Local Codes & Standards

11. Start up and Testing of equipment and systems.

12. As-built Record Drawings.

13. Guarantee.

14. Clean-up.

1.06 COORDINATION OF WORK WITH OTHER TRADES AND SCHEDULING

A. It is imperative that This Contractor coordinate his work with the General Contractor and all other trades involved with the installation of his equipment or working in the same building areas in which he is working.

1.07 UTILITIES, AUTHORITIES, FEES

A. This Contractor must obtain all required plans and permits, pay for all required fees and schedule all inspections.

1.08 WORK NOT INCLUDED IN THIS CONTRACT

A. Finish patching and associated painting.

1.09 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. This Contractor shall submit shop drawings for the following items to the Architect for approval in accordance with Division 1.

1. All valves

2. All plumbing fixtures and trim, drains, safe wastes, and cleanouts,

3. Water heaters and trim

4. Sump pumps & basins

1.10 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Substitutions of equipment or materials other than those specified must be approved in writing by the Architect. NO SUBSTITUTIONS WILL BE CONSIDERED AFTER BIDDING UNLESS SUBSTANTIAL CREDIT CAN BE OFFERED.

Page 8: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 221113 - 4 PLUMBING

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

B. Alternate equipment and/or materials must be equal to the quality and performance specifications of that specified in every respect.

C. Substitutions may be requested, provided that the Contractor requests such substitution in compliance with the Architect's instructions.

D. There are certain areas in this work where equipment clearances are critical. Substitutions of equipment other than that specified must be very carefully checked to assure that no problems will occur due to dimensional differences, connection points, weights, etc. This Contractor shall accept the responsibility and costs if substituted equipment causes interference with other trades or requires engineering or architectural changes or evaluations. He shall submit to The Architect detailed drawings of any substituted piece of equipment showing its installed location and relationship with the structure, piping, ducts, fixtures and other equipment. These drawings shall be submitted and approved in addition to the normal shop drawings and must be approved before the equipment may be ordered.

1.11 DRAWINGS AND FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A. All project drawings and Specifications are hereby made a part of these Specifications.

B. It is imperative that this Contractor visit the site and make a careful survey including field measurements. No extra compensation will be allowed on the account of differences between dimensions and measurements in the field and those indicated on the Drawings. The Drawings are diagrammatic and indicative of the work to be accomplished. The Contractor shall investigate all conditions affecting his work and shall provide all such offsets, fittings, valves, etc., as may be required to meet conditions at the buildings and to have complete and operating systems without additional cost to the Owner.

PART 2 - MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

2.01 GENERAL

A. All materials and equipment shall be new and conform to the grade, quality and standards specified. Equipment shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. This Contractor shall obtain these instructions from the manufacturer and these instructions shall be considered part of these Specifications. Type and capacity shall be as described in these Specifications or shown on the Drawings.

B. This Contractor shall be responsible for all materials, equipment and appurtenances furnished by him and special care shall be taken to protect all parts thereof from being damaged.

2.02 REPAIR AND DAMAGE

A. This Contractor shall, at his own expense, make good to the satisfaction of the Architect, any damage to work installed under these Specifications, from action of elements or any other cause prior to acceptance, that results from neglect on the part of the Contractor or his representatives.

Page 9: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 221113 - 5 PLUMBING

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

2.03 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. This Contractor shall be responsible for all cutting and rough patching required by him for the proper accomplishment of his work and the installation of piping and all equipment.

B. No building structural members shall be cut, drilled or removed nor the building integrity compromised in any way for the installation of this work.

C. Penetrations through rated assemblies shall be firestopped to maintain the required rating.

D. Masonry surfaces shall be properly sawcut or core-drilled as required.

E. This contractor shall be responsible for cutting of the roof for the purpose of installing plumbing vents and provide required new flashing of type and style required.

2.04 PIPING - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. The various piping systems shall be installed in general, as shown on the Drawings. Piping shall be installed so as not to interfere with lighting outlets, conduits, ducts, etc. Piping shall be run concealed in finished portions of the building where possible.

B. Piping shall be cut accurately and shall be worked into place without springing or forcing. Piping shall be installed to provide for proper drainage and to permit free expansion and contraction without lifting or tilting the connected equipment or causing damage to the structure. All changes in direction shall be made with fittings. All piping shall be thoroughly cleaned before erection.

C. Threaded pipe shall have full cut threads and all pipe shall have burrs removed by reaming. Screw joints shall be made with a pipe joint compound applied on the male threads only. Pipe joint compound shall be Retorseal No. 5.

D. Pipe, fittings, valves and other piping specialties shall be manufactured in the U.S.A.

E. All piping shall be labeled with Seton Corp. labels per industry standards.

2.05 PIPE SUPPORTS AND SLEEVES

A. Piping shall be supported in such a manner as to maintain required pitch and allow for expansion and contraction. All piping shall be supported from the building structure on adjustable type hangers or supports.

B. All hangers shall be complete with adjusting nuts, threaded rods, beam clamps or inserts for concrete as required and shall be copper plated to match the supported pipe. Scrap iron, plastic, wire or chain hangers will not be permitted.

Page 10: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 221113 - 6 PLUMBING

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

C. For copper pipe, provide hangers on 10’-0” centers for pipe 1-1/4”, and larger and on 8’-0” centers for pipes smaller than 1-1/4”. where concentrated loads of valves or fittings occur, closer spacing may be necessary. Hangers shall be installed not more than 12” from each change in direction of piping.

2.06 UNIONS

A. This Contractor shall provide all unions shown on the Drawings and/or required. Unions shall be installed adjacent to all equipment and all other places wherever their presence will facilitate easy removal of equipment, service of equipment or replacement of equipment.

B. For connections between pipes of dissimilar metals, dielectric pipe unions shall be used. Dielectric unions shall have metal connections on both ends. Gasket retainer shall meet Federal Specification WW-U-531-A with respect to tensile strength and shall meet ASA #Bl6.8 with respect to construction. Unions shall be Epco or equal.

2.07 HOT AND COLD WATER PIPING

A. Hot and cold water piping shall be Type L hard copper. Fittings shall be solder type wrought copper. Solder shall be Harris Stay-Brite. Solder containing lead will not be permitted.

B. Copper piping shall be installed in such a way as to prevent it from contacting any ferrous metals. Where connections are made to ferrous pipe or equipment, dielectric unions shall be used.

2.08 VALVES - GENERAL

A. This Contractor shall provide all valves as shown on the Drawings or as required. Valves may not be shown in every instance, but whether shown or not, all valves necessary for the proper

operation of the systems shall be furnished and installed. Shut-off valves shall be installed in the branch mains and at each piece of equipment. Drain valves shall be installed at low points to facilitate draining of the various parts of the systems.

B. Valves shall be full port, ball type, bronze body with chromium plated ball, reinforced Teflon seat and seals and blow-out proof stem. Valves shall be rated for 400 PSI WOG minimum. Valves shall be Series 77 as manufactured by Apollo or approved equal by Watts or Nibco.

C. Check valves shall be bronze body, ball type with teflon seats. Valves shall be Series 61 as manufactured by Apollo or approved equal by Watts or Nibco.

2.09 PLUMBING MATERIALS

A. This Contractor shall provide all plumbing materials. He shall comply with local municipal authorities with respect to all required rules, regulations, fees and permits needed to do this work.

Page 11: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 221113 - 7 PLUMBING

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

B. The underground sanitary, waste and vent system under the building shall be piped with Schedule 40 PVC plastic pipe and fittings.

C. The above ground sanitary, waste and vents shall be piped with Standard weight no-hub cast iron pipe and fittings ASTM A888 and CISPI 3301 with type 305 AISI stainless steel 5/16" hex hand couplings. The Contractor may use, at his option, type L copper tubing with wrought copper drainage fittings for sizes 2” or smaller. The Contractor may use, at his option, Schedule 40 PVC plastic pipe and fittings in all areas outside of the return air plenum.

2.10 PLUMBING FIXTURES, TRIM AND BRASS

A. This Contractor shall provide plumbing equipment, fixtures and trim as indicated on the Drawings and in accordance with the instructions, models and types given on the Drawings and described in the Specifications. P.C. shall verify mounting height of all fixtures with the Architect.

B. The plumbing fixtures and fixture trim was selected from the American Standard catalog to establish quality and intent, fixtures as manufactured by Kohler, Eljer, Crane if equal and approved by the Architect and Owner will be acceptable. Fixtures shall be white unless noted otherwise. All fixture trim including faucets, drains, traps, stops and supplies shall be of high quality chrome plated brass. All faucets shall be by the same manufacturer and shall be as manufactured by Chicago Brass or approved equal by American Standard, Kohler or Eljer.

C. FIXTURES

See sheet P-201.

2.11 MISCELLANEOUS PLUMBING FIXTURES, TRIM & BRASS

A. SERVICE SINK (SS-1)

B. Wall Hydant (HB-1) Josam 71000, with stainless steel box, integral vacuum breaker and loose key handle.

2.12 CLEANOUTS

A. Finished floor - Josam Series 56000 with carpet marker in carpeted areas.

B. Finished wall - Josam Series 58608 10” round stainless steel cover plate.

C. Approved equals: Zurn, Ancon.

D. Provide all cleanouts as shown and as required by the Local Plumbing Code.

2.13 FLOOR DRAIN

Page 12: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 221113 - 8 PLUMBING

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

A. See sheet P-201.

B. Approved equals: Zurn, Ancon.

2.14 PIPE INSULATION

A. Contractor shall insulate all domestic water piping.

B. Cold water piping shall be insulated with 1/2” of polypropylene type insulation having a 25/50 flame/smoke rating. All joints shall be carefully cut, mitered and sealed. Insulation shall be Self-Sealing Armaflex 2000 or approved equal.

C. AUTOMATIC CIRCULATING SYSTEMS: Piping shall be insulated with 1” of polypropylene type insulation having a 25/50 flame/smoke rating and conductivity of not exceeding than .27 BTU/INCH/HxSFxDEGREE F. All joints shall be carefully cut, mitered and sealed. Insulation shall be Self-Sealing Armaflex 2000 or approved equal.

D. All exposed traps stops and supplies in handicapped accessible areas shall be insulated with fully molded insulation. Insulation shall conform to all applicable BOCA, ANSI, NFPA and Federal Codes, and shall conform to ASTM burning and thermal conductivity standards. Insulation shall be white in color. Insulation shall consist of 3 piece interlocking trap assembly and 2 piece interlocking angle stop/supply assembly and shall be fastened with nylon wire tie type fasteners, which shall be factory supplied. Insulation shall be Model C50OR as manufactured by Brocar.

E. All ductwork shall be labeled with Seton Corp. labels per industry standards.

2.15 WATER HEATER (WH-1)

A. Provide an electric water heater as scheduled on P201. Heater shall have the following features.

1. ASME tank construction

2. R-16 foam tank insulation

3. Glass lined tank

4. ASME temperature/pressure relief valve.

C. Expansion tank

D. Recirculating pump

C. Combination temperature/pressure gauge.

E. Set water heater at 120 degrees F.

Page 13: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 221113 - 9 PLUMBING

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

2.16 Water Service Equipment: 1. Provide all water service equipment as detailed on the Drawings. All water service equipment shall be by the same manufacturer. 2. Reduced pressure zone type backflow preventer: Conbraco Series 40-200 with isolation ball valves and air gap fitting. 3. Pressure reducing valve: Conbraco Series 36C bronze body with thermoplastic cap. 4. Pressure gauges: H.O. Trerice Series 600 0-160 psi.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 DISINFECTION OF WATER SYSTEM

A. After the pressure test and before the water distribution system is placed into service, this Contractor shall thoroughly flush all dirt and foreign matter from the new water lines to the satisfaction of the Architect and the Owner.

B. Should the initial treatment, in the opinion of the Architect, prove ineffective, the flushing procedure shall be repeated until confirmed tests show that the water sampled from the new system conforms to local requirements.

3.02 CLEANUP

A. This Contractor shall on a continual basis, clean up all dirt, debris accumulated as a result of his work as the work progresses.

B. Upon completion of the work this Contractor shall perform the following cleanup operations:

1. Clean all plumbing fixtures inside and out with appropriate cleaning solutions.

2. Remove seals placed over floor drains during construction.

3. Wipe clean all faucets, flush valves, cleanout covers and hydrants.

3.03 START UP AND TEST

A. This Contractor shall give the Architect a minimum of 48 hours notice for inspections that require the Architect to visit the job site.

B. At the completion of the work, this Contractor shall start and test all systems according to the manufacturer's instructions.

F. This Contractor shall operate all systems for a period of forty-eight (48) hours after the installations have been completed and shall demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Architect that every part of each system is in good operating condition and performing properly.

Page 14: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 221113 - 10 PLUMBING

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

G. At the completion of the start up and testing, this Contractor shall furnish two copies of all data obtained to the Architect.

3.04 GUARANTEE

A. All, work and equipment performed and installed under this Contract shall be guaranteed against defects for a period of one (1) year from the date of acceptance by the owner. Any replacement or repairs including labor and materials shall be made without cost to the Owner within the guarantee period.

3.05 DOCUMENTATION

A. At the completion of the start up period this Contractor shall furnish to the Architect:

1. Two sets of as-built drawings.

2. Complete manufacturer's operation and maintenance instructions for all equipment and controls furnished by him.

3. Manufacturer's warranties.

END OF SECTION 15400

Page 15: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 221113.1 - 1 FIRE PROTECTION

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

SECTION 221113.1

FIRE PROTECTION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY:

A. These specifications are issued to cover work in connection with the complete installation of the Fire Protection work. This specification is to indicate minimum work and minimum standards for equipment, materials and procedures.

B The specifications section "General Conditions" and "Special Requirements" form a part of this section by this reference thereto and shall have the same force and effect as if printed herewith in full.

C. The complete installation shall be in accordance with contract drawings, specifications, NFPA 13, NFPA 24, NFPA 25, IBC, utility company regulations, insurance underwriter, and governmental agencies having jurisdiction.

D. The Fire Protection System shall be a hydraulically calculated system.

E. In this Section, "Contractor" is the same as the Fire Protection Contractor.

F. Related Sections

1. 07270 Firestopping

2. 15400 Plumbing

3. 15500 Mechanical

1.02 SCOPE OF WORK

A. These Specifications and accompanying Drawings are intended to cover the furnishing of all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary for the construction of a Fire Protection System including a hydraulic design. Small items of material, equipment and appurtenances not mentioned in detail or shown on the Drawings, but necessary for complete and operational systems, shall be furnished and installed by this Contractor without additional charge to the Owner and shall be included under this Contract. The following work shall be included as the Base Bid:

1. The first & second floor fire protection system is to be a wet pipe system. Provide an approved backflow preventer, gate valve, fire department connection, riser check valve for the sprinkler service as herein specified.

2. All work shall be approved & installed per Authorities Having Jurisdiction 3. Hydrant flow test.

Page 16: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 221113.1 - 2 FIRE PROTECTION

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

4. Visit the site and verify all conditions. 5. Provide systems for areas as shown on drawings and herein specified. 6. The Fire Protection Contractor is responsible for providing sprinklers to all areas shown. 7. All pipe, supports, and hangers. 8. Alarm check valves. 9. Controlling valves and accessories. 10. Sprinkler heads. 11. Fire department connection. 12. Water flow alarm switches. 13. Monitor switches. 14. Cleaning of all piping and apparatus, including general cleaning. 15. Start-up and approvals 16. Tests and guarantees. 17. Instructions and training to the Owner's Personnel.

B. The wiring to the fire alarm system is not included in the work under this section of these specifications see section 16000.

1.03 DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS:

A. Provide and install a complete hydraulic designed sprinkler system for the entire building.

B. Verify that a standard fire hydrant is provided within 150 feet hose lay distance of the fire department pumper connection.

C. The system must be hydraulically calculated.

System design shall meet the following.

All Areas - 225 square feet per head.

Density Area

.10/1500 All*

* The area of operation shall be increased by 30% for a dry pipe system if so employed.

Allow for possible water supply deterioration in the future, or initial flow test error. Allowance should be at least 5 psi below the curve of the test corrected to expected seasonal lows.

1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Obtain permits, and request inspections from the authorities having jurisdiction.

1.05 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

A. Install Work in locations shown on Drawings, unless prevented by Project conditions.

Page 17: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 221113.1 - 3 FIRE PROTECTION

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

B. Prepare drawings showing proposed rearrangement of Work to meet Project conditions, including changes to Work specified in other Sections. Obtain permission of Architect/Engineer before proceeding.

1.06 SHOP DRAWINGS:

A. The sprinkler contractor shall prepare drawings coordinated with other plumbing, mechanical, electrical, structural and general building. These drawings along with the hydraulic calculations shall be submitted to and approved by the owner, insurance underwriter, and appropriate governmental agencies for their review and approval. Five (5) copies of those approved drawings and calculations, bearing the approval stamp of the insurance underwriter, and appropriate governmental agencies shall then be submitted to the Architect/Engineer for approval, prior to the commencement of any fabrication or installation of any portion of the system. Include the following as a minimum in these submissions:

1. All piping, supports, and hangers.

2. Sprinkler heads.

3. Detection devices.

4. Control System

5. Water flow switches.

6. Monitor switches.

7. All valves and appurtenances.

8. Sprinkler systems layouts.

B. Space Requirements: All equipment and accessories requiring normal servicing, operation or maintenance shall be made easily accessible. Contractor shall layout his work from dimensions of architectural drawings and structural drawings and actual dimensions of equipment being installed. Layouts in congested areas should not be measured from mechanical drawings.

1.07 PERMITS, TESTS, AND INSPECTIONS:

A. Provide all required notices, obtain and pay for all permits, and pay all deposits and fees necessary for the installation, tests and inspection of all work provided under this specification.

B. The entire fire protection system shall be tested as per NFPA 13, NFPA 24 and NFPA 25. All defective work shall be promptly repaired or replaced with new material. Tests shall be repeated until a satisfactory test has been made. Notify local authorities, owner, and architect/engineer 72 hours prior to testing for witnessing of test, if so desired.

C. Any damage, resulting from the tests shall be repaired and/or replaced, all to the satisfaction of the Architect, at no expense of the owner.

Page 18: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 221113.1 - 4 FIRE PROTECTION

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

D. All tests shall be made in accordance with the requirements of the authorities having jurisdiction and as hereinafter specified.

1.08 GUARANTEE:

A. The contractor shall furnish a guarantee covering all labor and materials furnished by him for a period of one year from the date of substantial completion of the entire project. He shall agree to repair and make good at his expense, any and all defects which may appear in his work during the time when, in the judgement of the authorities, such defects arise from defective workmanship and imperfect or inferior material.

B. In addition, the above shall not in any way void or abrogate the equipment manufacturer's guarantee or warranty on equipment. All such guarantee or warranty certificates shall be delivered to the owner.

1.09 INSTRUCTIONS OF OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE:

A. Contractor shall instruct owner's representative in the proper operation and maintenance of all elements of the fire protection systems. Competent representatives of the contractor shall spend the time necessary for instruction.

1.10 CATALOG DATA FOR OWNER:

A. Contractor shall provide in vinyl looseleaf binders a compilation of catalog data of each manufactured item of equipment used in the mechanical work, and shall present this compilation to the Architect for transmittal to the Owner before final payment is made. Descriptive data and printed installation, operating, and maintenance instructions for each item of equipment shall be included. A complete double index shall be provided as follows:

1. Listing the products alphabetically by name. 2. Alphabetically listing the names of manufacturers whose products have been incorporated in

the work, together with their addresses and the names and addresses of the local sales representatives.

B. Three completed binders shall be provided to Owner.

1.11 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A. Include start-up instructions, maintenance data, parts lists, controls, and accessories.

PART 2 - EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS

2.01 GENERAL

A. All materials shall be new and shall bear the manufacturers name, and the UL and FM label in every case where a standard has been established for the particular material. The equipment to be furnished under each section of the specification shall be essentially the standard product of a

Page 19: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 221113.1 - 5 FIRE PROTECTION

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of the required type of equipment and shall be the manufacturer's latest approved design.

B. Equipment and materials of the same general type shall be of the same make throughout the work to provide uniform appearance, operation, and maintenance. Specific Manufacture and Model Numbers are provided for reference only.

C. Contractor shall furnish and install all equipment, accessories, connections, and incidental items necessary to fully complete the work, ready for use, occupancy, and operation by the Owner.

D. Electrical contacts on all valves requiring supervision/monitoring including controlling valves, riser check valves, flow alarms, monitor switches, etc. shall be such as to perform the functions required or described under this section and the Electrical Specifications.

E. All piping shall be labeled with Seton Corp. labels per industry standards.

2.02 PIPING MATERIALS:

A. Furnish and install, all the necessary pipe, fittings, hangers, or other items essential for the complete installation. Comply with the requirements of NFPA 13, and NFPA 24, the underwriting agency, and the authorities having jurisdiction.

2.03 PIPING SPECIALTIES:

A. BACKFLOW PREVENTER:

1. Double Check Detector Valve Assemblies: [ANSI/ASSE 1012] [AWWA C506];300 series stainless steel body, 100% lead free with a single two-bolt grooved style access cover, corrosion resistant internal parts and stainless steel springs. Two independently operating, spring loaded check valves with two resilent wedge gate valves, and bypass assembly. The bypass assembly consists of a meter a double check including shut-off valves and test cocks. Each cam check shall be internally loaded and provide a positive drip tight enclosure against reverse flow, intermediate atmospheric vent; Model 3000ss manufactured by Ames Co.

B. CONTROLLING VALVES:

1. All valves shall be UL labeled and FM approved, and to be installed per NFPA 13, and NFPA 24.

2. All controlling valves shall be OS&Y valves, complete with monitor switches as hereinafter specified and ready for supervisory wiring to be accomplished by the Electrical Contractor.

3. Provide all necessary drain and check valves. There shall be an independent shut-off and drain for each section without interfering with the supply of any other section or zone.

C. RISER CHECK VALVES:

Page 20: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 221113.1 - 6 FIRE PROTECTION

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

1. Furnish and install riser check valves where required, complete with riser check valve, vane-type waterflow detector, butterfly valve, and trim, including but not limited to, pressure gauges, drain valves, and all other accessories and piping required for a complete, operating system. The unit shall be a Gem Model F517 or approved equal.

D. FLOW ALARMS:

1. Furnish and install vane-type waterflow detectors as required by authorities having jurisdiction, model VSR-F as manufactured by Potter Electric Signal Co.

E ELECTRIC ALARM:

1. Electrically operated, red enameled gong with pressure alarm switch.

F. MONITOR SWITCHES:

1. Monitor switches shall be Grinnell Model F-460 with mounting accessories for OS&Y valves.

G. FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION:

1. Fire Department Connection: Connection shall be an approved siamese type, cast brass with chrome finish, and shall have inlet plugs or chains and caps to match. Siamese shall be installed 18 to 48 inches above grade. Siamese shall have double inlets with a self-closing clapper valve in each inlet, 2 1/2"x2 1/2"x4" in size with threads and arrangement conforming to the local Fire Department requirements. Siamese shall be No. 5750 wall type as manufactured by Potter-Roemer Inc. or equal by Elkhart Brass Manufacturing.

2. Fire Department connection escutcheon plates shall read "AUTOSPKR".

J. FLEXIBLE SPRINKLER CONNECTION

1. The Flexible Sprinkler Connection As manufactured for Viking by Paradise Industry Co., Ltd. Reference Flexible Sprinkler Connection Model FPSJ-4/1000) or equal. Maximum Working Pressure of Flexible Connection: 200 PSI (13.8 Bar) *Metric K-factor measurement is shown in Bar. When pressure is measured in kPa, divide the metric K-factor shown by 10.0. Test Pressure of Flexible Connection: 400 PSI (28 Bar) Maximum Temperature Rating of Flexible Connection: 300 °F (149 °C) WARNING: Refer to the sprinkler technical data page, as the temperature rating and maximum pressure rating of the sprinkler may be different than the flexible sprinkler connection. Connection to Branch Line: 1” NPT Male Thread Minimum Bend Radius: 3” (76 mm), measured to the inside surface of the bent hose Maximum Number of Bends per Hose: 3 Tube Length: 38” (965 mm) Friction Loss Data:

Page 21: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 221113.1 - 7 FIRE PROTECTION

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

Equivalent Length of 1” Steel Pipe (including 3 bends) With 38” (965) Tube = 34 ft. (10.4 m)

2.04 SPRINKLER HEADS:

Automatic sprinkler heads shall be of the type listed below:

1. Exposed Area Type: a. Type: Standard upright type. b. Head Finish: Brass c. Fusible Link: Fusible solder link type or Glass bulb type, temperature rated for

specific area hazard.

2. Finished Area Type: a. Type: Concealed pendent type. b. Head Finish: brass c. Cover Plate: Painted to match ceiling d. Fusible Link: Fusible solder link type or Glass bulb type, temperature rated for

specific area hazard.

PART 3 - EXECUTION:

3.01 GENERAL PIPING INSTALLATION:

A. All fire and sprinkler piping shall be carefully aligned and, unless otherwise noted, shall run parallel or at right angles to walls and partitions. Make final connections to sprinklers utilizing UL/FM flexible sprinkler piping per Viking Corporation or equal.

B. Piping shall be properly supported and adequate provisions shall be made for expansion, contraction, slope, and anchorage.

C. All piping shall be arranged so as not to interfere with the removal of other equipment or devices, nor to block access to doors, windows, or other access openings.

D. Minimum slopes of piping for drainage shall be in accordance with NFPA 13, and NFPA 24.

E. Provide approved flushing connections on mains and crossmains.

F. All piping shall be coordinated with all other trades to avoid interference.

3.02 HANGERS, SUPPORTS, AND FASTENINGS:

A. The Contractor shall furnish and install hangers, supports, and fasteners to properly support pipe. The hangers shall be of approved design by NFPA 13 and NFPA 24.

3.03 PIPE SLEEVES AND PLATES:

A. Furnish and install all necessary pipe sleeves and plates required for the complete installation of the

Page 22: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 221113.1 - 8 FIRE PROTECTION

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

work. Pipe sleeves shall be as hereinafter specified.

3.04 SPRINKLER SPACING:

A. The sprinkler heads shall conform with ceiling panel construction.

B. Sprinkler heads in plaster ceilings shall be symmetrical with lights, diffusers, and room configuration.

C. Sprinkler head spacing and location with relation to structure and ceilings shall conform to the requirements of NFPA 13 and the underwriting agency. The contractor shall be responsible for providing the proper quantity of sprinkler heads so as to comply with such requirements as well as the requirements noted above relative to coordination with other ceiling-mounted components.

3.05 DRAIN PIPING:

A. Contractor shall furnish and install piping and controls as required for complete drainage of the sprinkler systems. Where discharge is to a plumbing drain, a funnel shall be furnished and installed at the floor drain.

B. Where special conditions occur in branch lines, drains shall be installed in accordance with NFPA 13.

3.06 SPARE SPRINKLERS:

A. Contractor shall provide an approved metal cabinet with hinged door and catch which contains a minimum of 6 (but not less than required by NFPA 13) sprinkler heads of each type and rating used on the project suitably mounted therein, together with a sprinkler wrench for installing same.

B. Cabinet shall be mounted where directed by the architect/engineer.

3.07 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION:

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Field inspection and testing will be performed on a regular basis by the manufacturer's representative.

END OF SECTION 15300

Page 23: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 233713 - 1 MECHANICAL Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

SECTION 233713

MECHANICAL

PART 1- GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Mechanical work and controls

2. General Information

B. Related Sections

1. 07270 Firestopping

2. 221113 Plumbing

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. The General Conditions and all Contract Requirements shall apply with equal force to all portions of the work and become a part of the Contract.

B. Workmen especially trained in each branch of the work or trade shall be employed for the careful execution of this Contract in all of its phases. Workmanship shall be first class in all respects and meet the approval of the Architect. Any work poorly done must be removed and replaced at once upon condemnation.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Where the words, "This Contractor" or "M.C." are used in these Specifications, they shall mean the Mechanical Contractor.

B. E.C. shall mean the Electrical Contractor.

C. P.C. shall mean the Plumbing Contractor.

D. G.C. shall mean the General Contractor.

E. The term “provide” shall mean "furnish and install".

F. Any item referred to in the singular number shall include as many of the items required for a complete job.

1.04 FEES, PERMITS, AND CODES

Page 24: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 233713 - 2 MECHANICAL Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

A. This Contractor shall give all requisite notices, obtain and pay for all permits, deposits and fees necessary for the installation of the work under these Specifications. Two copies of certificates of approval shall be obtained from any department issuing it and shall be turned over to the owner prior to final acceptance of the work.

B. Nothing contained in these Specifications or shown on the Drawings shall be construed to conflict with any State or Local Laws, Ordinances, Rules and Regulations; and the work of the Contractor shall comply with the above. Where any part of the work specified or shown on the Drawings, is not in accordance with all applicable laws, ordinances, Regulations and Codes, this Contractor shall make all changes required by the enforcing Authorities. All such changes shall be made in a manner approved by the Architect and shall be made without any further cost to the Owner.

1.05 SCOPE OF WORK

A. These Specifications and accompanying Drawings are intended to cover the furnishing of all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary for the installation of HVAC systems. Small items of material, equipment and appurtenances not mentioned in detail or shown on the Drawings, but necessary for complete and operational systems, shall be furnished and installed by this Contractor without additional charge to the Owner and shall be included under this Contract as the Base Bid:

1. Visit the site and verify all conditions. 2. Obtain all required permits for this work. 3. Provide rooftop unit. 4. Provide fan-powered and VAV terminal units. 5. Provide air distribution systems as shown on the Drawings including grilles, registers,

diffusers, balancing dampers, louvers and fire dampers. 6. Provide exhaust fans, ductwork and roof vents. 7. Provide all low voltage controls and control wiring. 8. Furnish electric heaters for installation and wiring by the E.C. 9. Furnish line voltage wiring diagrams for all new equipment to the E.C. 10. Provide an air balance of the new systems to the air quantities shown on the Drawings. 11. Perform all work in accordance with the latest standards of:

ASHRAE

SMACNA

NEC

OSHA

BOCA

National Fire Protection Association

Municipal and Local Codes

Page 25: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 233713 - 3 MECHANICAL Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

13. Start, test and balance.

14. Guarantee

15. Clean up

16. Catalog data, operation instructions and maintenance instructions to the Owner

1.06 UTILITIES, AUTHORITIES, FEES

A. This Contractor must obtain all required permits, pay for all required fees and schedule all inspections.

1.07 WORK NOT INCLUDED IN THIS CONTRACT

A. Finish patching and associated painting.

B. Power wiring.

C. Providing of equipment disconnect switches.

D. Installation and wiring of electric heaters.

1.08 SCHEDULING

A. It is imperative that this Contractor coordinates his work with the Architect, General Contractor and all other trades involved with the installation of his equipment or working in the same building areas in which he is working.

1.09 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. This Contractor shall furnish shop drawings to the Architect for approval in accordance with requirements of Division 1 for the following items:

1. Rooftop units 2. Terminal units – fan-powered boxes and VAV boxes 3. Exhaust fans 4. Grilles, registers, diffusers 5. Fire & smoke dampers 6. Electric Heaters

B. Submittals shall be generated specifically for this job using standard formats and shall meet the requirements of the Architect. Pages showing multiple items shall clearly indicate which items are being submitted.

1.10 SUBSTITUTIONS

Page 26: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 233713 - 4 MECHANICAL Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

A. Substitutions of equipment or materials other than those specified must be approved in writing by the Architect. NO SUBSTITUTIONS WILL BE CONSIDERED AFTER BIDDING UNLESS SUBSTANTIAL CREDIT CAN BE OFFERED.

B. Alternate equipment and/or materials must be equal to the quality and performance specifications of that specified in every respect.

C. Substitutions may be requested, provided that the Contractor requests such substitution in compliance with the Architect's instructions.

D. There are certain areas in this work where equipment clearances are critical. Substitutions of equipment other than that specified must be very carefully checked to assure that no problems will occur due to dimensional differences, connection points, weights, etc. This Contractor shall accept the responsibility and costs if substituted equipment causes interference with other trades or requires engineering or architectural changes or evaluations. He shall submit to The Architect detailed drawings of any substituted piece of equipment showing its installed location and relationship with the structure, piping, ducts, fixtures and other equipment. These drawings shall be submitted and approved in addition to the normal shop drawings and must be approved before the equipment may be ordered.

1.11 DRAWINGS AND FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A. All drawings and all Project drawings and Specifications are hereby made a part of these Specifications.

B. It is imperative that this Contractor visit the site and make a careful survey including field measurements. No extra compensation will be allowed on the account of differences between dimensions and measurements in the field and those indicated on the Drawings. The Drawings are diagrammatic and indicative of the work to be accomplished. The Contractor shall investigate all conditions affecting his work and shall furnish and install all such offsets, fittings, valves, sheet metal work, etc., as may be required to meet conditions at the buildings and to have complete and operating systems without additional cost to the Owner.

1.12 REPAIR AND DAMAGE

A. This Contractor shall, at his own expense, make good to the satisfaction of the owner, any damage to work installed under these Specifications, from action of elements or any other cause prior to acceptance, that results from neglect on the part of the Contractor or his representatives.

1.13 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. This Contractor shall be responsible for all cutting and rough patching required by him for the proper accomplishment of his work and the installation of piping and all equipment.

B. No building structural members shall be cut, drilled or removed nor the building integrity compromised in any way for the installation of this work.

Page 27: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 233713 - 5 MECHANICAL Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

C. Penetrations through rated assemblies shall be firestopped in accordance with Section 07270 to maintain the required rating.

D. Masonry surfaces shall be properly sawcut or core-drilled as required.

1.14 FIRE AND SMOKE SEALS

A. Penetrations of fire and smoke rated assemblies shall be made with core drilled holes. Penetrations shall then be sealed against the passage of smoke and/or fire with UL listed devices having ratings equal to or greater than the UL rating of the fire and/or smoke barrier.

B. Refer to Section 07270 for project information

PART 2 - MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

2.01 GENERAL

A. All material and equipment, except as noted, shall be new and conform to the grade, quality and standards specified. Equipment shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. This Contractor shall obtain these instructions from the manufacturer and these instructions shall be considered part of these Specifications. Type and capacity shall be as described in these Specifications or shown on the Drawings.

B. This Contractor shall be responsible for all materials, equipment and appurtenances furnished by him and special care shall be taken to protect all parts thereof from being damaged.

2.02 ROOF TOP UNIT

A. See Drawings M101, M102, M201 & M301 for schedule and information.

2.03 TERMINAL UNITS

A. See Drawings M101, M102, M201 & M301 for schedule and information

2.04 EXHAUST FAN

A. This contractor shall provide exhaust fans and associated ductwork as shown on the Drawings. All exhaust fans shall be vented to the outside.

B. Exhaust fans shall be ceiling mounted centrifugal exhausters. Fans shall be AMCA certified for air and sound performance. Fan housing and wheel shall be constructed of galvanized steel and shall include backdraft damper. Motor shall be permanently lubricated. Fans shall be Model as manufactured by Greenheck with capacities as shown on the Drawings. Units shall include factory furnished roof or wall caps as required.

2.05 ELECTRIC HEATERS

A. This Contractor shall furnish electric heaters for installation and wiring by the E.C. Coordinate electrical characteristics with E.C. prior to equipment procurement.

Page 28: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 233713 - 6 MECHANICAL Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

B. Units shall be as scheduled as Drawings, as manufactured by Markel or equals by Berko.

2.06 GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS

A. See Drawings for all grille, diffuser and accessory specifications, locations and CFM.

B. In general, Titus grilles and diffusers are specified, equal as manufactured by Krueger, E.H. Price Company or Nailor-Hart are acceptable.

C. All grilles, registers and diffusers shall have a factory applied off-white finish unless otherwise noted on Plans.

2.07 DAMPERS

A. Rectangular volume dampers shall be of steel construction, with opposed blade configuration. Dampers shall be Model VCD-400 as manufactured by Greenheck in sizes as shown on the Drawings.

B. Round balancing dampers shall be installed as part of the conical takeoffs specified below.

2.08 FIRE DAMPERS

A. This Contractor shall furnish and install fire dampers with fusible links where shown on the Drawings and/or required by Code. Fire dampers shall conform to the requirements of NFPA, applicable state codes and the local Fire Marshall. Dampers shall be UL555 rated and have demonstrated their ability to close via link release under 350 degrees F heated air flow, source from ambient measured conditions of 3000 FPM (open) and 6" W.G. (closed) pressure.

B. Fire dampers shall be installed at all duct penetrations through rated walls and ceilings whether shown on the drawings or not.

C. Fire dampers shall include an optional streamliner baffle on the input side for low air resistance. Damper shall be Model 5500 as manufactured by Prefco Products, Inc.

D. Access doors shall be provided in ducts as required for inspection and resetting of dampers, and in finished walls or ceilings, except in those areas with lay- in ceilings.

2.09 SHEET METAL DUCTWORK

A. This Contractor shall provide all ductwork and ductwork modifications as shown on the Drawings. All ductwork shall be neat, accurate, mechanically tight and rigidly constructed. The sizes shown on the Drawings for rectangular ducts are free inside dimensions and do not include allowance for liner.

B. All ductwork shall be constructed and installed in accordance the latest editions of the following SMACNA manuals:

Page 29: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 233713 - 7 MECHANICAL Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards HVAC Systems-Duct Design Flexible Duct Performance Standard Fire Damper and Heat Stop Guide For Air Handling Systems

Duct Liner Application Standard

And the following NFPA Manuals: Standard 9OA-Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems Standard 9OB-Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems

C. Ducts shall be constructed of new ASTM 527 galvanized steel sheets, G-60 or better, as shown on the Drawings. Slip & drive and Pittsburgh seam joints shall be sealed with Uni-Grip Duct Sealer as manufactured by United McGill when assembled. Duct tape is not acceptable, caulking joints after assembly is not acceptable.

D. Flex duct shall be constructed of a polyester core with a galvanized wire helix and covered with 2" 3/4 lb. density fiberglass and flame retardant polyolefin vapor barrier. Flex duct shall be Model Type "9" as manufactured by Flexmaster. Flex duct connections shall be secured with "Panduit" type asteners.

E. The total length of flex duct connected to any diffuser shall not exceed five feet.

F. All connections from rectangular to round ducts shall be made with Flexmaster or Buckley bellmouth conical fittings with damper.

G. Round duct shall be insulated with 1-1/2” Thermo-Sleeve slip on insulation with vapor barrier.

H. All branch ducts and takeoffs shall be equipped with volume dampers with adjustable quadrants.

I. All supply and return air ductwork shall be insulated with 1-1/2" thick ductwrap with a reinforced foil/kraft all service jacket. Installed R value shall not be less than 5.0 for unconditioned spaces and 8.0 for exterior ducts or ducts located within attics. Joints shall be stapled approximately 6" on center with outward clinching staples and sealed with pressure sensitive tape matching the facing. Where ducts are 24" in width or greater, insulation shall be additionally secured with mechanical fasteners such as pins and speed clip washers spaced 18" on center to prevent sagging.

J. Exhaust air ducts in Attics shall be insulated with 1-1/2" thick ductwrap.

K. At Contractor's option, ductwork specified to be insulated may be lined in lieu of externally wrapped. Free area must be maintained and allowances made for liner. Thickness of liner shall be selected to maintain "R" value specified for ductwrap. Liner shall be neoprene-coated fiberglass, meeting requirements of NFPA Bulletins 90A and 90B.

2.10 VIBRATION ISOLATION

Page 30: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 233713 - 8 MECHANICAL Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

A. This Contractor shall install all mechanical equipment and ductwork in such a manner as to minimize the transmission of vibrations and noise to the building structures and spaces.

B. All duct connections to mechanical equipment shall be made using flexible connectors.

2.11 PIPING-GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. The various piping systems shall be installed in general, as shown on the Drawings. Piping shall be installed so as not to interfere with lighting outlets, conduits, ducts, etc. Piping shall be run concealed in finished portions of the building where possible.

B. Piping shall be cut accurately and shall be worked into place without springing or forcing. Piping shall be installed to provide for proper drainage and to permit free expansion and contraction without lifting or tilting the connected equipment or causing damage to the structure. All changes in direction shall be made with fittings. All piping shall be thoroughly cleaned before erection.

C. Threaded pipe shall have full cut threads and all pipe shall have burrs removed by reaming. Screw joints shall be made with a pipe joint compound applied on the male threads only. Pipe joint compound shall be Retorseal No. 5.

D. Pipe, fittings, valves and other piping specialties shall be manufactured in the U.S.A.

2.12 PIPE SUPPORTS

A. Piping shall be supported in such a manner as to maintain required pitch and allow for expansion and contraction. All piping shall be supported from the building structure on adjustable type hangers or supports.

B. All hangers shall be complete with adjusting nuts, threaded rods, beam clamps or inserts for concrete as required and shall be black, galvanized or copper plated to match the supported pipe. Scrap iron, wire or chain hangers will not be permitted.

C. For steel or copper pipe, provide hangers on 10’-0” centers for pipe 1-1/4" and larger and on 8'-0”centers for pipes smaller than 1-1/4". Where concentrated loads of valves or fittings occur, closer spacing may be necessary. Hangers shall be installed not more than 12" from each change in direction of piping.

2.13 SLEEVES AND SUPPORTS

A. All piping passing through walls, floors, partitions and ceilings shall be fitted with sleeves. Sleeves shall be two sizes larger than pipe when uninsulated and large enough to allow for pipe insulation without binding. Each sleeve shall extend through its respective floor, wall, partition or ceiling and shall be cut flush with each surface unless otherwise specified. Where pipe is insulated, the insulation shall be continuous through the sleeve.

B. Sleeves for vertical pipe passing through floors shall be Schedule 40 black steel pipe and shall extend one inch above the surface of the finished floor and ¼” below the bottom surface.

Page 31: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 233713 - 9 MECHANICAL Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

Sleeves for vertical pipe passing through plaster ceilings shall be 22 gauge galvanized steel set flush with the finished ceiling.

C. Sleeves for horizontal pipe passing through interior walls or partitions shall be Sch. 40 black steel pipe and shall terminate flush with wall finish on both sides.

D. At all exposed pipe passing through walls, floors and ceilings in finished areas, attach a heavy cast brass chromium plated set screw type wall, floor or ceiling plate as required to completely conceal the sleeve. Plates shall be constructed of one piece and shall be attached so that they will stay in place and permit the free expansion and contraction of the piping.

E. Penetrations through rated assemblies shall be properly firestopped in order to maintain the required-rating. See specification section 07270.

F. Sleeves for exterior wall penetrations of refrigerant lines shall be Schedule 40 PVC.

2.14 UNIONS

A. This Contractor shall furnish and install all unions shown on the Drawings and/or required. Unions shall be installed adjacent to all equipment and all other places wherever their presence will facilitate easy removal of equipment, service of equipment or replacement of equipment.

2.15 VALVES-GENERAL

A. This Contractor shall provide all valves as shown on the Drawings or as required. Valves may not be shown in every instance, but whether shown or not, all valves necessary for the proper operation of the systems shall be provided.

B. Ball valves shall be bronze body with chromium plated ball, reinforced Teflon seat and seals and blow-out proof stem, stamped WOG on the body. Valves shall be as manufactured by Apollo.

2.16 STRUCTURAL SUPPORT

A. This Contractor shall provide additional structural support for conduit, ductwork, equipment, and piping as required to distribute the load upon the building structure without over stressing individual structural members.

2.17 STARTERS, DISCONNECTS AND PHASE PROTECTION

A. This Contractor shall furnish starters, contactors and overload heaters for all equipment provided by him. These devices will be installed by the Electrical Contractor. Unless otherwise supplied by the equipment manufacturer, starters shall be NEMA Type 1, full voltage, Allen-Bradley Bulletin 509 with accessory devices as required or equal as manufactured by Furnas or Siemens. M.C. to furnish starters and contactors for equipment provided by him.

B. The Electrical Contractor shall provide all disconnect switches as required by the N.E.C. unless such switches as furnished as factory installed components in the equipment furnished by this

Page 32: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 233713 - 10 MECHANICAL Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

Contractor. This Contractor shall inform the Electrical Contractor of all disconnect switches required and of the ampacities required.

C. All new three phase equipment shall be equipped with factory or field installed phase lock/phase reversal protection devices. Devices shall be Time Mark Model 158 or approved equal.

PART 3 - CONTROLS

3.01 CONTROLS - GENERAL

A. This Contractor shall provide all controls, thermostats, timers, relays, transformers and control wiring for the condensing units and furnaces to accomplish the control sequences as described herein. All wiring shall be according to the equipment manufacturers instructions.

B. All control wiring shall be in accordance with the National Electric Code, Latest Edition and all applicable Local Codes.

C. Contractor is responsible for overall control system operation and coordination with equipment manufacturers and representatives. Verify location of all thermostats with Owner prior to installation.

D. Contractor shall provide detailed point to point wiring diagrams for all HVAC controls. Diagrams shall be generated specifically for this job and shall be furnished by the controls manufacturer. These diagrams shall be submitted with the controls submittal package.

3.02 PRODUCTS

A. This Contractor shall provide all controls required to accomplish the operating sequences specified below.

B. Thermostats shall be fully compatible, programmable and capable of the operating sequences described below.

3.03 ROOFTOP UNIT CONTROL SEQUENCE

A. Occupied: Blower shall operate continuously to provide 55F discharge supply air.. Supply Fan shall operate to provide outdoor air. Modulate economizer according to enthalpy.

B. Unoccupied: Unit shall be in night setback mode. Blower shall operate only upon a call for heating or cooling. Economizer shall be closed.

C. Morning Warm-Up: Unit shall be capable of providing increased discharge supply air of 80F during morning warm-up.

D. Thermostats shall be fully compatible, programmable and capable of the operating sequences described below.

Page 33: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 233713 - 11 MECHANICAL Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

E. Thermostats shall be provided with each terminal unit device, capable of sending a signal for staged electric heating, cooling, & ventilation.

3.04 MISC OPERATING SEQUENCES

A. Exhaust Fan: Unit shall operate in parallel with the rest room light.

B. Electric Heaters: Units shall cycle to maintain setpoint via integral thermostat.

PART 4 - EXECUTION

4.01 CLEAN UP

A. At the completion of the work, this Contractor shall remove all dirt, debris accumulated as a result of his work.

4.02 START UP AND TESTING

A. At the completion of the work, this Contractor shall start and test all systems according to the manufacturer's instructions.

B. This Contractor shall operate all systems for a period of forty-eight (48) hours after the installations have been completed and shall demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Architect that every part of each system is in good operating condition and performing properly.

4.03 AIR BALANCE

A. This Contractor shall provide complete testing and balancing of the air distribution systems and the equipment and apparatus connected thereto.

B. The work required herein shall consist of setting volume, flow and speed adjusting facilities provided or specified for the systems, recording data, making tests and preparing reports, all as hereinafter specified.

C. The work described in this Section shall be performed by Contractor personnel.

D. The environmental systems including all equipment, apparatus and distribution systems shall be tested and balanced in accordance with the NEBB Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Environmental Systems published by NEBB latest edition.

E. All instruments used for measurements shall be accurate, and calibration histories for each instrument shall be available for examination. Calibration and maintenance of all instruments shall be in accordance with the requirements of NEBB.

F. Accuracy of measurements shall be in accordance with NEBB standards.

G. Four copies of the final reports shall be submitted on applicable NEBB Reporting forms for review.

Page 34: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 233713 - 12 MECHANICAL Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

H. Each individual final Reporting Form submitted must bear the signature of the person who recorded the data.

I. Identification of all types of instruments used and their last dates of calibration will be submitted with the final report.

J. This Contractor shall guarantee that all testing and balancing work will be performed in accordance with NEBB standards.

K. If this Contractor fails to perform this phase of the work in accordance with NEBB standards and procedures, the architect or designated owner's representative may require a NEBB certified balance be provided at no additional cost to the owner.

4.04 SUBMISSION OF DATA

A. At the completion of the start-up, testing and balancing, this Contractor shall furnish six copies of all data obtained to the Architect. After review, the four copies will be returned to be included in the documentation manuals.

4.05 GUARANTEE

A. All work and equipment performed and installed under this Contract shall be guaranteed against defects for a period of one (1) year from the date of acceptance by the Owner. Any replacement or repairs including labor and materials shall be made without cost to the Owner within the guarantee period.

4.06 EQUIPMENT WARRANTIES

A. All products provided by this Contractor shall be warranted against defects for a minimum of one year from the date of the start up of the systems.

B. All air conditioning unit compressors shall have a manufacturer's extended warranty for four years in addition to the above one year warranty.

4.07 DOCUMENTATION

A. At the completion of the start-up period this Contractor shall furnish an "Owner's Manual" to the Architect which shall include:

1. Two sets of as-built drawings including power and control wiring diagrams.

2. Complete manufacturer's operation and maintenance instructions for all equipment and controls furnished by him.

3. Description of the overall operation of the systems installed including the location of all safety and overload devices and circuit breakers which the Owner can check or operate to prevent nuisance service calls.

Page 35: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 233713 - 13 MECHANICAL Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

4. Recommended service intervals and procedures.

5. Balance reports.

6. Manufacturer's warranties

END OF SECTION 15500

Page 36: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 260500 - 1 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

DOCUMENT 260500

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Electrical equipment coordination and installation. 2. Sleeves for raceways and cables. 3. Sleeve seals. 4. Grout. 5. Common electrical installation requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

B. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For sleeve seals.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate arrangement, mounting, and support of electrical equipment:

1. To allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights that reduce headroom are indicated.

2. To provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum interference to other installations.

3. To allow right of way for piping and conduit installed at required slope. 4. So connecting raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways will be clear of

obstructions and of the working and access space of other equipment.

Page 37: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 260500 - 2 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed.

C. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are behind finished surfaces or otherwise concealed. Access doors and panels are specified in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames."

D. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS AND CABLES

A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.

B. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel.

1. Minimum Metal Thickness:

a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches (1270 mm) and no side more than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.052 inch (1.3 mm).

b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or more than, 50 inches (1270 mm) and 1 or more sides equal to, or more than, 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.138 inch (3.5 mm).

2.2 SLEEVE SEALS

A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Calpico, Inc. c. Metraflex Co. d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

2. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit. Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable.

3. Pressure Plates: Plastic. Include two for each sealing element.

Page 38: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 260500 - 3 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.

2.3 GROUT

A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of unit for wall-mounting items.

C. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom consistent with these requirements.

D. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components of both electrical equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a way as to facilitate future disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the vicinity.

E. Right of Way: Give to piping systems installed at a required slope.

3.2 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Electrical penetrations occur when raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, or busways penetrate concrete slabs, concrete or masonry walls, or fire-rated floor and wall assemblies.

B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.

C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.

D. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall.

E. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls.

F. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level.

Page 39: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 260500 - 4 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

G. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or cable, unless indicated otherwise.

H. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry

1. Promptly pack grout solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect grout while curing.

I. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants.".

J. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at raceway and cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal raceway and cable penetration sleeves with firestop materials. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

K. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

L. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

M. Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION

A. Install to seal exterior wall penetrations.

B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

3.4 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies for electrical installations to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

END OF SECTION 260500

Page 40: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 260519 - 1 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

SECTION 260519

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less. 2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less. 3. Sleeves and sleeve seals for cables.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 26 Section "Undercarpet Electrical Power Cables" for flat cables for undercarpet

installations.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

B. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

C. Field quality-control test reports.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed.

Page 41: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 260519 - 2 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Alcan Products Corporation; Alcan Cable Division. 2. American Insulated Wire Corp.; a Leviton Company. 3. General Cable Corporation. 4. Senator Wire & Cable Company. 5. Southwire Company.

B. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70.

C. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for Types THHN-THWN.

D. Multiconductor Cable: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for metal-clad cable, Type MC with ground wire.

2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 3. O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC. 4. 3M; Electrical Products Division. 5. Tyco Electronics Corp.

B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated.

2.3 SLEEVES FOR CABLES

A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.

B. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel with minimum 0.052- or 0.138-inch (1.3- or 3.5-mm) thickness as indicated and of length to suit application.

D. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

Page 42: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 260519 - 3 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS

A. Feeders: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS

A. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

B. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Metal-clad cable

C. Class 1 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.

D. Class 2 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

C. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway.

D. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible.

E. Support cables according to Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

F. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

Page 43: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 260519 - 4 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

B. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.

C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches (150 mm) of slack.

3.5 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.

C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.

D. Rectangular Sleeve Minimum Metal Thickness:

1. For sleeve rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches (1270 mm) and no side greater than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.052 inch (1.3 mm).

2. For sleeve rectangle perimeter equal to, or greater than, 50 inches (1270 mm) and 1 or more sides equal to, or greater than, 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.138 inch (3.5 mm).

E. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall.

F. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both wall surfaces.

G. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level.

H. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space between sleeve and cable.

I. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry.

J. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint according to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

K. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal with firestop materials according to Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

L. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

M. Aboveground Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

Page 44: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 260519 - 5 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

3.6 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION

A. Install to seal underground exterior-wall penetrations.

B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for cable material and size. Position cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

3.7 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

END OF SECTION 260519

Page 45: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 260529 - 1 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

SECTION 260529

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems. 2. Construction requirements for concrete bases.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 26 Section "Vibration And Seismic Controls For Electrical Systems" for products and installation requirements necessary for compliance with seismic criteria.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.

C. RMC: Rigid metal conduit.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Steel slotted support systems. 2. Nonmetallic slotted support systems.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

Page 46: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 260529 - 2 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.

B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS

A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

a. Allied Tube & Conduit. b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. c. ERICO International Corporation. d. GS Metals Corp. e. Thomas & Betts Corporation. f. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd. g. Wesanco, Inc.

2. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4.

3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating applied according to MFMA-4.

4. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA-4.

5. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.

B. Nonmetallic Slotted Support Systems: Structural-grade, factory-formed, glass-fiber-resin channels and angles with 9/16-inch- (14-mm-) diameter holes at a maximum of 8 inches (200 mm) o.c., in at least 1 surface. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

a. Allied Tube & Conduit. b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. c. Fabco Plastics Wholesale Limited. d. Seasafe, Inc.

2. Fittings and Accessories: Products of channel and angle manufacturer and designed for use with those items.

3. Fitting and Accessory Materials: Same as channels and angles.

Page 47: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 260529 - 3 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

4. Rated Strength: Selected to suit applicable load criteria.

C. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.

D. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.

E. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron.

F. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

G. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following:

1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one

of the following:

1) Hilti Inc. 2) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 3) MKT Fastening, LLC. 4) Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.; Masterset Fastening Systems Unit.

2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, [zinc-coated] [stainless] steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one

of the following:

1) Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc. 3) Hilti Inc. 4) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 5) MKT Fastening, LLC.

3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.

4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached structural element.

5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325.

6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type. 7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.

Page 48: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 260529 - 4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

2.2 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES

A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of supported equipment.

B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for steel shapes and plates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.

B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch (6 mm) in diameter.

C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits.

1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps.

D. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports.

3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article.

B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70.

C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb (90 kg).

D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code:

Page 49: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 260529 - 5 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. 2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. 3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor

fasteners on solid masonry units. 4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners. 5. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock

washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches (100 mm) thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick.

6. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69. 7. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. 8. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,

panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate.

E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS

A. Comply with installation requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for site-fabricated metal supports.

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

3.4 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils (0.05 mm).

B. Touchup: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal.

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

END OF SECTION 260529

Page 50: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 260533 - 1 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

SECTION 260533

RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 26 Section "Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems" for exterior ductbanks, manholes, and underground utility construction.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

B. ENT: Electrical nonmetallic tubing.

C. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

D. FMC: Flexible metal conduit.

E. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.

F. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.

G. LFNC: Liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit.

H. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

I. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets.

Page 51: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 260533 - 2 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

B. Shop Drawings: For the following raceway components. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Custom enclosures and cabinets. 2. For handholes and boxes for underground wiring, including the following:

a. Duct entry provisions, including locations and duct sizes. b. Frame and cover design. c. Grounding details. d. Dimensioned locations of cable rack inserts, and pulling-in and lifting irons. e. Joint details.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Alflex Inc. 3. Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co. 4. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose. 5. Electri-Flex Co. 6. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex. 7. Maverick Tube Corporation. 8. O-Z Gedney; a unit of General Signal. 9. Wheatland Tube Company.

B. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.

C. Aluminum Rigid Conduit: ANSI C80.5.

D. IMC: ANSI C80.6.

E. EMT: ANSI C80.3.

F. FMC: [Zinc-coated steel][ or aluminum].

Page 52: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 260533 - 3 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

G. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket.

H. Fittings for Conduit (Including all Types and Flexible and Liquidtight), EMT, and Cable: NEMA FB 1; listed for type and size raceway with which used, and for application and environment in which installed.

1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886. 2. Fittings for EMT: Steel type. 3. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness, 0.040 inch (1 mm),

with overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints.

I. Joint Compound for Rigid Steel Conduit or IMC: Listed for use in cable connector assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded raceway joints from corrosion and enhance their conductivity.

2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose. 3. Arnco Corporation. 4. CANTEX Inc. 5. CertainTeed Corp.; Pipe & Plastics Group. 6. Condux International, Inc. 7. ElecSYS, Inc. 8. Electri-Flex Co. 9. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. 10. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex. 11. RACO; a Hubbell Company. 12. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 13. <Insert manufacturer's name.>

B. ENT: NEMA TC 13.

C. RNC: NEMA TC 2, Type EPC-40-PVC.

D. LFNC: UL 1660.

E. Fittings for ENT and RNC: NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.

F. Fittings for LFNC: UL 514B.

Page 53: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 260533 - 4 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

2.3 NONMETALLIC WIREWAYS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Hoffman. 2. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.

B. Description: Fiberglass polyester, extruded and fabricated to size and shape indicated, with no holes or knockouts. Cover is gasketed with oil-resistant gasket material and fastened with captive screws treated for corrosion resistance. Connections are flanged, with stainless-steel screws and oil-resistant gaskets.

C. Description: PVC plastic, extruded and fabricated to size and shape indicated, with snap-on cover and mechanically coupled connections with plastic fasteners.

D. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.

2.4 SURFACE RACEWAYS

A. Surface Nonmetallic Raceways: Two-piece construction, manufactured of rigid PVC with texture and color selected by Architect from [manufacturer's standard] [custom] colors. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

a. Butler Manufacturing Company; Walker Division. b. Enduro Systems, Inc.; Composite Products Division. c. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems Division. d. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. e. Panduit Corp. f. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The). g. Wiremold Company (The); Electrical Sales Division.

2.5 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Cooper Crouse-Hinds; Div. of Cooper Industries, Inc. 2. EGS/Appleton Electric. 3. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company. 4. Hoffman. 5. Hubbell Incorporated; Killark Electric Manufacturing Co. Division. 6. O-Z/Gedney; a unit of General Signal. 7. RACO; a Hubbell Company.

Page 54: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 260533 - 5 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

8. Robroy Industries, Inc.; Enclosure Division. 9. Scott Fetzer Co.; Adalet Division. 10. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company. 11. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 12. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The). 13. Woodhead, Daniel Company; Woodhead Industries, Inc. Subsidiary.

B. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

C. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, Type FD, with gasketed cover.

D. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 2.

E. Nonmetallic Floor Boxes: Nonadjustable, round.

F. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION

A. Comply with the following indoor applications, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT. 2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT. 3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: Rigid steel conduit. Includes

raceways in the following locations:

a. Loading dock. b. Corridors used for traffic of mechanized carts, forklifts, and pallet-handling units. c. Mechanical rooms.

4. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT. 5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations.

6. Damp or Wet Locations: Rigid steel conduit. 7. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4, stainless

steel in damp or wet locations.

B. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch (21-mm) trade size.

C. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.

1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless otherwise indicated.

Page 55: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 260533 - 6 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with that material. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer.

D. Install nonferrous conduit or tubing for circuits operating above 60 Hz. Where aluminum raceways are installed for such circuits and pass through concrete, install in nonmetallic sleeve.

E. Do not install aluminum conduits in contact with concrete.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 for installation requirements applicable to products specified in Part 2 except where requirements on Drawings or in this Article are stricter.

B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches (150 mm) away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.

D. Support raceways as specified in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab.

F. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for communications conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed.

G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.

H. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions.

I. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors, including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.

J. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb (90-kg) tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack at each end of pull wire.

K. Install raceway sealing fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings at the following points:

1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces.

Page 56: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 260533 - 7 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

2. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

L. Flexible Conduit Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches (1830 mm) of flexible conduit for recessed and semirecessed lighting fixtures,equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors.

1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage. 2. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage.

M. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall.

N. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.

O. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface.

3.3 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.

C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.

D. Rectangular Sleeve Minimum Metal Thickness:

1. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches (1270 mm) and no side greater than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.052 inch (1.3 mm).

2. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or greater than, 50 inches (1270 mm) and 1 or more sides equal to, or greater than, 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.138 inch (3.5 mm).

E. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall.

F. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls.

G. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level.

H. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space between sleeve and raceway.

I. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry.

Page 57: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 260533 - 8 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

J. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Refer to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and installation.

K. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at raceway penetrations. Install sleeves and seal with firestop materials. Comply with Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

L. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways with flexible, boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

M. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

3.4 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION

A. Install to seal underground, exterior wall penetrations.

B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway material and size. Position raceway in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

3.5 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.

2. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer.

END OF SECTION 260533

Page 58: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 260553 - 1 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

SECTION 260553

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Identification for raceways. 2. Identification of power and control cables. 3. Identification for conductors. 4. Underground-line warning tape. 5. Warning labels and signs. 6. Instruction signs. 7. Equipment identification labels. 8. Miscellaneous identification products.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.

B. Samples: For each type of label and sign to illustrate size, colors, lettering style, mounting provisions, and graphic features of identification products.

C. Identification Schedule: An index of nomenclature of electrical equipment and system components used in identification signs and labels.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.

E. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969.

Page 59: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 260553 - 2 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual; and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.

C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.

D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 POWER RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway size.

B. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less:

1. Black letters on an orange field. 2. Legend: Indicate voltage.

C. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at More Than 600 V:

1. Black letters on an orange field. 2. Legend: "DANGER CONCEALED HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING" with 3-inch- (75-mm-

) high letters on 20-inch (500-mm) centers.

D. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

E. Snap-Around Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

F. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeve, 2 inches (50 mm) long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

G. Tape and Stencil for Raceways Carrying Circuits More Than 600 V: 4-inch- (100-mm-) wide black stripes on 10-inch (250-mm) centers diagonally over orange background that extends full length of raceway or duct and is 12 inches (300 mm) wide. Stop stripes at legends.

Page 60: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 260553 - 3 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

H. Metal Tags: Brass or aluminum, 2 by 2 by 0.05 inch (50 by 50 by 1.3 mm), with stamped legend, punched for use with self-locking cable tie fastener.

I. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.010 inch (0.25 mm)] [0.015 inch (0.38 mm) thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie for attachment to conductor or cable.

1. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag manufacturer.

2. Marker for Tags: Machine-printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by printer manufacturer.

2.2 ARMORED AND METAL-CLAD CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway and cable size.

B. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V and Less:

1. Black letters on an orange field. 2. Legend: Indicate voltage.

C. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at More Than 600 V:

1. Black letters on an orange field. 2. Legend: "DANGER CONCEALED HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING" with 3-inch- (75-mm-

) high letters on 20-inch (500-mm) centers.

D. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

E. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Tape: Colored, heavy duty, waterproof, fade resistant; 2 inches (50 mm) wide; compounded for outdoor use.

2.3 POWER AND CONTROL CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway and cable size.

B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

C. Metal Tags: Brass or aluminum, 2 by 2 by 0.05 inch (50 by 50 by 1.3 mm), with stamped legend, punched for use with self-locking cable tie fastener.

D. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie for attachment to conductor or cable.

Page 61: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 260553 - 4 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

1. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag manufacturer.

2. Marker for Tags: Machine-printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by printer manufacturer.

E. Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

F. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeve, 2 inches (50 mm) long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

2.4 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils (0.08 mm) thick by 1 to 2 inches (25 to 50 mm) wide.

B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

C. Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

D. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeve, 2 inches (50 mm) long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

E. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process.

F. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie for attachment to conductor or cable.

1. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag manufacturer.

2. Marker for Tags: Machine-printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by printer manufacturer.

2.5 FLOOR MARKING TAPE

A. 2-inch- (50-mm-) wide, 5-mil (0.125-mm) pressure-sensitive vinyl tape, with black and white stripes and clear vinyl overlay.

Page 62: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 260553 - 5 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

2.6 UNDERGROUND-LINE WARNING TAPE

A. Tape:

1. Recommended by manufacturer for the method of installation and suitable to identify and locate underground electrical and communications utility lines.

2. Printing on tape shall be permanent and shall not be damaged by burial operations. 3. Tape material and ink shall be chemically inert, and not subject to degrading when

exposed to acids, alkalis, and other destructive substances commonly found in soils.

B. Color and Printing:

1. Comply with ANSI Z535.1 through ANSI Z535.5. 2. Inscriptions for Red-Colored Tapes: ELECTRIC LINE, HIGH VOLTAGE. 3. Inscriptions for Orange-Colored Tapes: TELEPHONE CABLE, CATV CABLE,

COMMUNICATIONS CABLE, OPTICAL FIBER CABLE.

2.7 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS

A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory-printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment unless otherwise indicated.

C. Baked-Enamel Warning Signs:

1. Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size required for application.

2. 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) grommets in corners for mounting.

3. Nominal size, 7 by 10 inches (180 by 250 mm).

D. Metal-Backed, Butyrate Warning Signs:

1. Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose-acetate butyrate signs with 0.0396-inch (1-mm) galvanized-steel backing; and with colors, legend, and size required for application.

2. 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) grommets in corners for mounting.

3. Nominal size, 10 by 14 inches (250 by 360 mm).

E. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:

1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD - EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES."

2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES (915 MM)."

Page 63: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 260553 - 6 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

2.8 INSTRUCTION SIGNS

A. Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick for signs up to 20 sq. inches (129 sq. cm) and 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick for larger sizes.

1. Engraved legend with black letters on white face. 2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners. 3. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable

equipment.

B. Adhesive Film Label: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm).

C. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm). Overlay shall provide a weatherproof and UV-resistant seal for label.

2.9 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS

A. Adhesive Film Label: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm).

B. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm). Overlay shall provide a weatherproof and UV-resistant seal for label.

C. Self-Adhesive, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Adhesive backed, with white letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm).

D. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting. White letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm).

E. Stenciled Legend: In nonfading, waterproof, black ink or paint. Minimum letter height shall be 1 inch.

2.10 CABLE TIES

A. General-Purpose Cable Ties: Fungus inert, self extinguishing, one piece, self locking, Type 6/6 nylon.

1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch (5 mm). 2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F (23 deg C), According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi (82.7

MPa). 3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 85 deg C). 4. Color: Black except where used for color-coding.

Page 64: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 260553 - 7 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

B. UV-Stabilized Cable Ties: Fungus inert, designed for continuous exposure to exterior sunlight, self extinguishing, one piece, self locking, Type 6/6 nylon.

1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch (5 mm). 2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F (23 deg C), According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi (82.7

MPa). 3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 85 deg C). 4. Color: Black.

C. Plenum-Rated Cable Ties: Self extinguishing, UV stabilized, one piece, self locking.

1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch (5 mm). 2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F (23 deg C), According to ASTM D 638: 7000 psi (48.2

MPa). 3. UL 94 Flame Rating: 94V-0. 4. Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 284 deg F (Minus 46 to plus 140 deg C). 5. Color: Black.

2.11 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Paint: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for paint materials and application requirements. Select paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or interior).

B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.

B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.

C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.

D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.

E. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate.

F. System Identification Color-Coding Bands for Raceways and Cables: Each color-coding band shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors,

Page 65: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 260553 - 8 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

at 50-foot (15-m) maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot (7.6-m) maximum intervals in congested areas.

G. Aluminum Wraparound Marker Labels and Metal Tags: Secure tight to surface of conductor or cable at a location with high visibility and accessibility.

H. Cable Ties: For attaching tags. Use general-purpose type, except as listed below:

1. Outdoors: UV-stabilized nylon. 2. In Spaces Handling Environmental Air: Plenum rated.

I. Underground-Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous underground-line warning tape directly above line at 6 to 8 inches (150 to 200 mm) below finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope exceeds 16 inches (400 mm) overall.

J. Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for surface preparation and paint application.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE

A. Concealed Raceways, Duct Banks, More Than 600 V, within Buildings: Tape and stencil 4-inch- (100-mm-) wide black stripes on 10-inch (250-mm) centers over orange background that extends full length of raceway or duct and is 12 inches (300 mm) wide. Stencil legend "DANGER CONCEALED HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING" with 3-inch- (75-mm-) high black letters on 20-inch (500-mm) centers. Stop stripes at legends. Apply to the following finished surfaces:

1. Floor surface directly above conduits running beneath and within 12 inches (300 mm) of a floor that is in contact with earth or is framed above unexcavated space.

2. Wall surfaces directly external to raceways concealed within wall. 3. Accessible surfaces of concrete envelope around raceways in vertical shafts, exposed in

the building, or concealed above suspended ceilings.

B. Accessible Raceways, Armored and Metal-Clad Cables, More Than 600 V: Self-adhesive vinyl labels. Install labels at 10-foot (3-m) maximum intervals.

C. Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad Cables, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and Branch Circuits More Than 30A, and 120V to ground: Identify with self-adhesive vinyl label. Install labels at 10-foot maximum intervals.

D. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use color-coding conductor tape to identify the phase.

1. Color-Coding for Phase[ and Voltage Level] Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed below for ungrounded [service] [feeder] [and] [branch-circuit] conductors.

a. Color shall be factory applied[ or field applied for sizes larger than No. 8 AWG, if authorities having jurisdiction permit].

Page 66: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 260553 - 9 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

b. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:

1) Phase A: Black. 2) Phase B: Red. 3) Phase C: Blue.

c. Colors for 480/277-V Circuits:

1) Phase A: Brown. 2) Phase B: Orange. 3) Phase C: Yellow.

d. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum distance of 6 inches (150 mm) from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings.

E. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, More than 600 V: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use write-on tags.

F. Install instructional sign including the color-code for grounded and ungrounded conductors using adhesive-film-type labels.

G. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach [write-on tags] [marker tape] to conductors and list source.

H. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, and signal connections.

1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation.

2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections.

3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual.

I. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape for power, lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable.

1. Limit use of underground-line warning tape to direct-buried cables. 2. Install underground-line warning tape for both direct-buried cables and cables in

raceway.

J. Workspace Indication: Install floor marking tape to show working clearances in the direction of access to live parts. Workspace shall be as required by NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1926.403 unless otherwise indicated. Do not install at flush-mounted panelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces.

K. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Self-adhesive warning labels.

Page 67: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 260553 - 10 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

1. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145. 2. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background. 3. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access.

L. Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation.

M. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification.

1. Labeling Instructions:

a. Indoor Equipment: Adhesive film label]. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) high letters on 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches (50 mm) high.

b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for

viewing from the floor. d. Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels with

appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of the enclosure.

2. Equipment to Be Labeled:

a. Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by panelboard manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be self-adhesive, laminated acrylic or melamine label.

b. Enclosures and electrical cabinets. c. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. d. Switchgear. e. Switchboards. f. Transformers: Label that includes tag designation shown on Drawings for the

transformer, feeder, and panelboards or equipment supplied by the secondary. g. Enclosed switches. h. Enclosed circuit breakers.

END OF SECTION 260553

Page 68: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 260923 - 1 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

SECTION 260923

LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following lighting control devices: 1. Indoor occupancy sensors.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. LED: Light-emitting diode.

B. PIR: Passive infrared.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Show installation details for occupancy and light-level sensors.

1. Interconnection diagrams showing field-installed wiring.

C. Field quality-control test reports.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of product to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

Page 69: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 260923 - 2 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of ceiling-mounted devices with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, smoke detectors, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INDOOR OCCUPANCY SENSORS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Hubbell Lighting. 2. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. 3. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc. 4. Novitas, Inc. 5. RAB Lighting, Inc. 6. Sensor Switch, Inc. 7. TORK. 8. Watt Stopper (The).

B. General Description: Wall- or ceiling-mounting, solid-state units with a separate relay unit.

1. Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, turn lights on when covered area is occupied and off when unoccupied; with a time delay for turning lights off, adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 15 minutes.

2. Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the connected relay, complying with UL 773A. Sensor shall be powered from the relay unit.

3. Relay Unit: Dry contacts rated for 20-A ballast load at 120- and 277-V ac, for 13-A tungsten at 120-V ac, and for 1 hp at 120-V ac. Power supply to sensor shall be 24-V dc, 150-mA, Class 2 power source as defined by NFPA 70.

4. Mounting:

a. Sensor: Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outlet box. b. Relay: Externally mounted through a 1/2-inch (13-mm) knockout in a standard

electrical enclosure. c. Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind hinged

door.

5. Indicator: LED, to show when motion is being detected during testing and normal operation of the sensor.

6. Bypass Switch: Override the on function in case of sensor failure. 7. Automatic Light-Level Sensor: Adjustable from 2 to 200 fc (21.5 to 2152 lx); keep

lighting off when selected lighting level is present.

Page 70: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 260923 - 3 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

C. Dual-Technology Type: Ceiling mounting; detect occupancy by using a combination of PIR and ultrasonic detection methods in area of coverage. Particular technology or combination of technologies that controls on-off functions shall be selectable in the field by operating controls on unit.

1. Sensitivity Adjustment: Separate for each sensing technology. 2. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch- (150-mm-) minimum movement of

any portion of a human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in. (232 sq. cm), and detect a person of average size and weight moving not less than 12 inches (305 mm) in either a horizontal or a vertical manner at an approximate speed of 12 inches/s (305 mm/s).

3. Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 1000 sq. ft. (93 sq. m) when mounted on a 96-inch- (2440-mm-) high ceiling.

2.2 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Power Wiring to Supply Side of Remote-Control Power Sources: Not smaller than No. 12 AWG. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

B. Classes 2 and 3 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller than No.18 AWG. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

C. Class 1 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller than No. 14 AWG. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SENSOR INSTALLATION

A. Install and aim sensors in locations to achieve not less than 90 percent coverage of areas indicated. Do not exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturer's written instructions.

3.2 WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Wiring Method: Comply with Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." Minimum conduit size shall be 1/2 inch (13 mm).

B. Wiring within Enclosures: Comply with NECA 1. Separate power-limited and nonpower-limited conductors according to conductor manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions, unless otherwise indicated.

Page 71: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 260923 - 4 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

D. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Identify controlled circuits in lighting contactors. 2. Identify circuits or luminaries controlled by photoelectric and occupancy sensors at each

sensor.

B. Label time switches and contactors with a unique designation.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. After installing time switches and sensors, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, adjust and test for compliance with requirements.

2. Operational Test: Verify operation of each lighting control device, and adjust time delays.

B. Lighting control devices that fail tests and inspections are defective work.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting sensors to suit occupied conditions.

END OF SECTION 260923

Page 72: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 262416 - 1 PANELBOARDS

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

SECTION 262416

PANELBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. SVR: Suppressed voltage rating.

B. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, switching and overcurrent protective device, transient voltage suppression device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.

1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings.

2. Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. 4. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices. 5. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices. 6. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent

protective devices and auxiliary components. 7. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 8. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent

protective device included in panelboards. Submit on translucent log-log graft paper; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.

Page 73: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 262416 - 2 PANELBOARDS

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

C. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.

D. Seismic Qualification Certificates: Submit certification that panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Include the following:

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.

3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.

E. Field Quality-Control Reports:

1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with

requirements.

F. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards. Submit final versions after load balancing.

G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices.

2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device that allows adjustments.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories from single source from single manufacturer.

C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for panelboards including clearances between panelboards and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

Page 74: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 262416 - 3 PANELBOARDS

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

E. Comply with NEMA PB 1.

F. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside panelboards; install temporary electric heating (250 W per panelboard) to prevent condensation.

B. Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to NECA 407.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations:

1. Do not deliver or install panelboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above panelboards is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

2. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated:

a. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding minus 22 deg F to plus 104 deg F. b. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet (2000 m).

B. Service Conditions: NEMA PB 1, usual service conditions, as follows:

1. Ambient temperatures within limits specified. 2. Altitude not exceeding 6600 feet (2000 m).

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.

Page 75: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 262416 - 4 PANELBOARDS

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace transient voltage suppression devices that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Keys: Two spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS

A. Enclosures: Surface-mounted cabinets.

1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location.

a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.

2. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts, match box dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box.

3. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within hinged trim cover.

4. Skirt for Surface-Mounted Panelboards: Same gage and finish as panelboard front with flanges for attachment to panelboard, wall, and ceiling or floor.

5. Gutter Extension and Barrier: Same gage and finish as panelboard enclosure; integral with enclosure body. Arrange to isolate individual panel sections.

6. Finishes:

a. Panels and Trim: Steel, factory finished immediately after cleaning and pretreating with manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat.

b. Back Boxes: Galvanized steel. c. Fungus Proofing: Permanent fungicidal treatment for overcurrent protective

devices and other components.

7. Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in transparent card holder.

B. Incoming Mains Location: Top.

C. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses:

Page 76: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 262416 - 5 PANELBOARDS

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

1. Material: Tin-plated aluminum. 2. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment grounding

conductors; bonded to box. 3. Isolated Ground Bus: Adequate for branch-circuit isolated ground conductors; insulated

from box. 4. Extra-Capacity Neutral Bus: Neutral bus rated 200 percent of phase bus and UL listed as

suitable for nonlinear loads. 5. Split Bus: Vertical buses divided into individual vertical sections.

D. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.

1. Material: Tin-plated aluminum. 2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Compression type. 3. Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Compression type. 4. Feed-Through Lugs: Compression type, suitable for use with conductor material. Locate

at opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device.

E. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices.

F. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Rated for series-connected system with integral or remote upstream overcurrent protective devices and labeled by an NRTL. Include size and type of allowable upstream and branch devices, listed and labeled for series-connected short-circuit rating by an NRTL.

G. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current available at terminals.

2.2 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type.

C. Mains: Circuit breaker or lugs only.

D. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units.

E. Contactors in Main Bus: NEMA ICS 2, Class A, electrically held, general-purpose controller, with same short-circuit interrupting rating as panelboard.

Page 77: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 262416 - 6 PANELBOARDS

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

1. Internal Control-Power Source: Control-power transformer, with fused primary and secondary terminals, connected to main bus ahead of contactor connection.

F. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.

G. Column-Type Panelboards: Narrow gutter extension, with cover, to overhead junction box equipped with ground and neutral terminal buses.

2.3 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

B. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with series-connected rating to meet available fault currents.

1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-mounted, field-adjustable trip setting.

3. Electronic trip circuit breakers with rms sensing; field-replaceable rating plug or field-replicable electronic trip; and the following field-adjustable settings:

a. Instantaneous trip. b. Long- and short-time pickup levels. c. Long- and short-time time adjustments. d. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.

4. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.

5. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault protection (6-mA trip).

6. Ground-Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: Class B ground-fault protection (30-mA trip).

7. Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupter (AFCI) Circuit Breakers: Comply with UL 1699; 120/240-V, single-pole configuration.

8. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories:

a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. b. Lugs: Compression style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor

materials.

Page 78: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 262416 - 7 PANELBOARDS

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

c. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge (HID) lighting circuits.

d. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator.

e. Undervoltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltage without intentional time delay.

f. Auxiliary Contacts: One SPDT switch with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts mimic circuit-breaker contacts and "b" contacts operate in reverse of circuit-breaker contacts.

g. Alarm Switch: Single-pole, normally open contact that actuates only when circuit breaker trips.

h. Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit circuit-breaker operation; key shall be removable only when circuit breaker is in off position.

i. Zone-Selective Interlocking: Integral with electronic trip unit; for interlocking ground-fault protection function with other upstream or downstream devices.

j. Multipole units enclosed in a single housing or factory assembled to operate as a single unit.

C. Fused Switch: NEMA KS 1, Type HD; clips to accommodate specified fuses; lockable handle.

1. Fuses, and Spare-Fuse Cabinet: Comply with requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Fuses."

2. Fused Switch Features and Accessories: Standard ampere ratings and number of poles. 3. Auxiliary Contacts: One normally open and normally closed contact(s) that operate with

switch handle operation.

2.4 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES

A. Accessory Set: Include tools and miscellaneous items required for overcurrent protective device test, inspection, maintenance, and operation.

B. Portable Test Set: For testing functions of solid-state trip devices without removing from panelboard. Include relay and meter test plugs suitable for testing panelboard meters and switchboard class relays.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NECA 407.

B. Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged or rusted or have been subjected to water saturation.

Page 79: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 262416 - 8 PANELBOARDS

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

C. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install panelboards and accessories according to NECA 407.

B. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from panelboards.

C. Mount top of trim 90 inches (2286 mm) above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.

D. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box.

E. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed.

1. Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges.

F. Install filler plates in unused spaces.

G. Stub four 1-inch (27-GRC) empty conduits from panelboard into accessible ceiling space or space designated to be ceiling space in the future. Stub four 1-inch (27-GRC) empty conduits into raised floor space or below slab not on grade.

H. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties after completing load balancing.

I. Comply with NECA 1.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs complying with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panelboard loads; incorporate Owner's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable.

C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

D. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

Page 80: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 262416 - 9 PANELBOARDS

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

C. Perform tests and inspections.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

D. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit.

E. Tests and Inspections:

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

3. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports:

a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each panelboard. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.

b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each panelboard 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

c. Instruments and Equipment:

1) Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

F. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

G. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable component to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.

Page 81: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 262416 - 10 PANELBOARDS

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.

C. Load Balancing: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, measure load balancing and make circuit changes.

1. Measure as directed during period of normal system loading. 2. Perform load-balancing circuit changes outside normal occupancy/working schedule of

the facility and at time directed. Avoid disrupting critical 24-hour services such as fax machines and on-line data processing, computing, transmitting, and receiving equipment.

3. After circuit changes, recheck loads during normal load period. Record all load readings before and after changes and submit test records.

4. Tolerance: Difference exceeding 20 percent between phase loads, within a panelboard, is not acceptable. Rebalance and recheck as necessary to meet this minimum requirement.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions.

END OF SECTION 262416

Page 82: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 262726 - 1 WIRING DEVICES

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

SECTION 262726

WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates. 2. Wall-box motion sensors. 3. Snap switches and wall-box dimmers. 4. Communications outlets.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.

C. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor.

D. RFI: Radio-frequency interference.

E. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.

F. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking wall plates.

Page 83: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 262726 - 2 WIRING DEVICES

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles:

1. Cooper Wiring Devices; a division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper). 2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell). 3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton). 4. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices & Accessories (Pass & Seymour).

2.2 STRAIGHT BLADE RECEPTACLES

A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, and UL 498. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Cooper; 5351 (single), 5352 (duplex). b. Hubbell; HBL5351 (single), CR5352 (duplex). c. Leviton; 5891 (single), 5352 (duplex). d. Pass & Seymour; 5381 (single), 5352 (duplex).

2.3 GFCI RECEPTACLES

A. General Description: Straight blade, [feed] [non-feed]-through type. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, and UL 943, Class A, and include indicator light that is lighted when device is tripped.

B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

Page 84: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 262726 - 3 WIRING DEVICES

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

a. Cooper; GF20. b. Pass & Seymour; 2084.

2.4 SNAP SWITCHES

A. Comply with NEMA WD 1 and UL 20.

B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Cooper; 2221 (single pole), 2222 (two pole), 2223 (three way), 2224 (four way). b. Hubbell; CS1221 (single pole), CS1222 (two pole), CS1223 (three way), CS1224

(four way). c. Leviton; 1221-2 (single pole), 1222-2 (two pole), 1223-2 (three way), 1224-2 (four

way). d. Pass & Seymour; 20AC1 (single pole), 20AC2 (two pole), 20AC3 (three way),

20AC4 (four way).

2.5 OCCUPANCY SENSORS

A. Wall-Switch Sensors: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Hubbell; AT120 for 120 V, AT277 for 277 V. b. Leviton; ODS 15-ID.

2. Description: Adaptive-technology type, 120/277 V, adjustable time delay up to 20 minutes, 180-degree field of view, with a minimum coverage area of 900 sq. ft. (84 sq. m).

2.6 COMMUNICATIONS OUTLETS

A. Telephone Outlet:

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Cooper; 3560-6. b. Leviton; 40649.

3. Description: Single RJ-45 jack for terminating 100-ohm, balanced, four-pair UTP; TIA/EIA-568-B.1; complying with Category 5e. Comply with UL 1863.

B. Combination TV and Telephone Outlet:

Page 85: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 262726 - 4 WIRING DEVICES

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Cooper; 3562. b. Leviton; 40595.

3. Description: Single RJ-45 jack for 100-ohm, balanced, four-pair UTP; TIA/EIA-568-B.1; complying with Category 5e; and one Type F coaxial cable connector.

2.7 WALL PLATES

A. Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices.

1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 2. Material for Finished Spaces: Smooth, high-impact thermoplastic 0.035-inch- (1-mm-)

thick. 3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel. 4. Material for Damp Locations: Thermoplastic with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed and

labeled for use in "wet locations."

2.8 FINISHES

A. Color: Wiring device catalog numbers in Section Text do not designate device color.

1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: Ivory.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1, including the mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise noted.

B. Coordination with Other Trades:

1. Take steps to insure that devices and their boxes are protected. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of the boxes.

2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables.

3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.

4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.

Page 86: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 262726 - 5 WIRING DEVICES

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

C. Conductors:

1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced or terminated on devices.

2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.

3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails.

4. Existing Conductors:

a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors. b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter. c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted provided the outlet box is large enough.

D. Device Installation:

1. Replace all devices that have been in temporary use during construction or that show signs that they were installed before building finishing operations were complete.

2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors.

3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment.

4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches (152 mm) in length.

5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid conductor tightly clockwise, 2/3 to 3/4 of the way around terminal screw.

6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by the manufacturer. 7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice

No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections. 8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device. 9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device

mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.

E. Receptacle Orientation:

1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles up, and on horizontally mounted receptacles to the right.

F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.

G. Dimmers:

1. Install dimmers within terms of their listing. 2. Verify that dimmers used for fan speed control are listed for that application. 3. Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers according to

manufacturers' device listing conditions in the written instructions.

Page 87: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 262726 - 6 WIRING DEVICES

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

H. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates.

I. Adjust locations of floor service outlets and service poles to suit arrangement of partitions and furnishings.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Receptacles: Identify panelboard and circuit number from which served. Use hot, stamped or engraved machine printing with black filled lettering on face of plate, and durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Tests for Convenience Receptacles:

1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V. 2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is not acceptable. 3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable. 4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943. 5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted. 6. The tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit

breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above.

END OF SECTION 262726

Page 88: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 262816 - 1 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

SECTION 262816

ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Fusible switches. 2. Nonfusible switches. 3. Receptacle switches. 4. Enclosures.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. NC: Normally closed.

B. NO: Normally open.

C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes.

1. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Current and voltage ratings. 3. Short-circuit current ratings (interrupting and withstand, as appropriate). 4. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices. 5. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent

protective devices, accessories, and auxiliary components.

B. Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

Page 89: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 262816 - 2 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with equipment served and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FUSIBLE SWITCHES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

B. Type GD, General Duty, Single Throw, 240-V ac, 800 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with cartridge fuse interiors to accommodate indicated fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

2.2 NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

B. Type GD, General Duty, Single Throw, 600 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

Page 90: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 262816 - 3 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

2.3 ENCLOSURES

A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.

1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated.

B. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.

D. Install fuses in fusible devices.

E. Comply with NECA 1.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs.

2. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform tests and inspections.

Page 91: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 262816 - 4 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

B. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch and circuit breaker, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

3. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports:

a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each enclosed switch and circuit breaker. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.

b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each enclosed switch and circuit breaker 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

c. Instruments and Equipment: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

4. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies enclosed switches and circuit breakers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges[ as specified in Division 26 Section "Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study"].

Page 92: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 262816 - 5 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

END OF SECTION 262816

Page 93: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 265100 - 1 INTERIOR LIGHTING

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

SECTION 265100

INTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Interior lighting fixtures, lamps, and ballasts. 2. Lighting fixture supports.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. BF: Ballast factor.

B. CRI: Color-rendering index.

C. CU: Coefficient of utilization.

D. HID: High-intensity discharge.

E. LER: Luminaire efficacy rating.

F. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided.

G. RCR: Room cavity ratio.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following:

1. Physical description of lighting fixture including dimensions. 2. Emergency lighting units including battery and charger. 3. Ballast. 4. Energy-efficiency data. 5. Air and Thermal Performance Data: For air-handling lighting fixtures. Furnish data

required in "Submittals" Article in Division 23 Section "Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles."

Page 94: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 265100 - 2 INTERIOR LIGHTING

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

6. Sound Performance Data: For air-handling lighting fixtures. Indicate sound power level and sound transmission class in test reports certified according to standards specified in Division 23 Section "Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles."

7. Life, output, and energy-efficiency data for lamps. 8. Photometric data, in IESNA format, based on laboratory tests of each lighting fixture

type, outfitted with lamps, ballasts, and accessories identical to those indicated for the lighting fixture as applied in this Project.

a. For indicated fixtures, photometric data shall be certified by a qualified independent testing agency. Photometric data for remaining fixtures shall be certified by the manufacturer.

b. Photometric data shall be certified by a manufacturer's laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP) for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

B. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by manufacturers' laboratories that are accredited under the National Volunteer Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

B. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by an independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is an NRTL as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

D. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty for Emergency Lighting Batteries: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer of battery-powered emergency lighting unit agrees to repair or replace components of rechargeable batteries that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

Page 95: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 265100 - 3 INTERIOR LIGHTING

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

B. Special Warranty for Ballasts: Manufacturer's standard form in which ballast manufacturer agrees to repair or replace ballasts that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period for Electronic Ballasts: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:

B. In Interior Lighting Fixture Schedule where titles below are column or row headings that introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.

2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.

3. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for each lighting fixture is based on the product named. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product by one of the other manufacturers specified.

2.2 LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed fixtures.

B. Fluorescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5 and NEMA LE 5A as applicable.

C. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.

D. Sheet Metal Components: Steel, unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.

E. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position.

F. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows, unless otherwise indicated:

1. White Surfaces: 85 percent. 2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent. 3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent.

Page 96: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 265100 - 4 INTERIOR LIGHTING

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

4. Laminated Silver Metallized Film: 90 percent.

G. Plastic Diffusers, Covers, and Globes:

1. Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.

a. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch minimum unless different thickness is indicated.

b. UV stabilized.

2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass, unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 BALLASTS FOR LINEAR FLUORESCENT LAMPS

A. Electronic Ballasts: Comply with ANSI C82.11; instant-start type, unless otherwise indicated, and designed for type and quantity of lamps served. Ballasts shall be designed for full light output unless dimmer or bi-level control is indicated.

1. Sound Rating: A. 2. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10 percent. 3. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A or better. 4. Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher. 5. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less. 6. BF: 0.85 or higher. 7. Power Factor: 0.95 or higher. 8. Parallel Lamp Circuits: Multiple lamp ballasts shall comply with ANSI C 82.11 and

shall be connected to maintain full light output on surviving lamps if one or more lamps fail.

2.4 LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS

A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel- and angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.

B. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch (13-mm) steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish same as fixture.

C. Twin-Stem Hangers: Two, 1/2-inch (13-mm) steel tubes with single canopy designed to mount a single fixture. Finish same as fixture.

D. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage (2.68 mm).

E. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch (5-mm) minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.

F. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug.

Page 97: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 265100 - 5 INTERIOR LIGHTING

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Lighting fixtures: Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls. Install lamps in each fixture.

B. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify transfer from normal power to battery and retransfer to normal.

B. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance with standards.

END OF SECTION 265100

Page 98: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 265900 - 1 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

SECTION 265900

FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

PART ONE – GENERAL

1.01 Description:

A. This Section outlines the requirements for adding the devices shown on plans to the existing building fire detection alarm system. The system shall be supplied, installed, tested, and certified by one manufacturer and the manufacturer’s authorized representative. The completed system shall be composed of the latest state of the art equipment of a single manufacturer and shall be Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) and Factory Mutual (FM) approved for use in fire detection systems meeting the requirements of NFPA 72. All equipment and parts supplied shall be new and/or unused in condition.

1.02 General Data:

A. The system shall be supplied by one manufacturer to match the existing building system.

B. The system shall include, but not be limited to the following features, functions and/or elements:

1. Circuit interface panels including all modules.

2. Power supplies, batteries and battery chargers.

3. Equipment enclosures.

4. Intelligent addressable devices including but not limited to manual pull stations with protective covers, heat detectors, smoke detectors, alarm monitoring modules, and supervised control modules.

5. Conventional non-addressable devices as required for performance to this specification. (All smoke detectors, heat detectors and manual pull stations shall be addressable.)

6. Audible and visual evacuation signals.

7. Software and firmware as required to provide a complete functioning system.

8. Wiring and raceway.

9. Installation, testing, system certification and personnel training.

10. Multiplex, system driven remote annunciators.

Page 99: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 265900 - 2 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

1.03 Quality Assurance:

A. The system shall be designed, furnished, installed and tested in accordance with the following standards, codes and/or Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ):

1. Factory Mutual (FM)

a. FM AG Approval Guide

2. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

a. NFPA 13 “Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems”.

b. NFPA 70 “National Electrical Code”.

c. NFPA 72 “National Fire Alarm Code”.

(1). The system must be in complete compliance with “total coverage” as defined by paragraph 5-1.4.2 of NFPA 72.

d. NFPA 90A “Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems”.

e. NFPA 96 “Standard for the Installation of Equipment for the Removal of Smoke and Grease-Laden Vapors from Commercial Cooking Equipment”.

f. NFPA 101 “Life Safety Code”.

3. Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc. (UL)

4. Appropriate UL standards.

5. The Local Building Codes as adopted By The Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).

6. The Americans with Disability Act, Public Law 101-336 (A.D.A.).

7. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) standard A17.1-90 Safety Code for Elevator and Escalators.

8. The 1999 Edition of the Building Officials and Code Administrators International, Inc. (BOCA).

9. National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies (NICET).

A. Prior to commencing with the installation of the fire alarm system, this contractor shall submit the plans for the fire alarm system to the local authority having jurisdiction for approval. This contractor shall pay all fees associated with this approval including the

Page 100: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 265900 - 3 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

fee for all inspections. An original “Stamped Approved Drawing” along with the Fire Marshall’s inspection certificate shall be delivered to the Architect.

1.04 Submittal:

A. Submit shop drawings and product data sheets in accordance with Division 1 of this specification.

B. The contractor shall include the following information in the equipment submittal: To determining if the contractor’s Power and Loading Calculations are correct, a complete “Bill of Material” shall be provided identifying the equipment quantities. These quantities will be used only in verifying that the contractor’s mathematical calculations are correct and are not to be intended as an approval of the contractor’s quantities.

1. Power calculations.

a. Power Supply load calculations complete with the spare capacity identified herein.

b. Battery capacity calculations.

c. Supervisory power requirements for all equipment.

d. Alarm power requirements for all equipment.

e. Justification showing power requirements of the system power supplies.

f. Voltage-drop calculations for wiring runs in worst case condition.

2. Loading calculations.

a. Loading calculations for all Initiating Device Circuits (IDC) complete with the spare capacities as identified herein. The maximum number of allowable of devices on any IDC shall not exceed 1.

b. Loading calculations for all Signaling Line Circuits (SLC) complete with the spare capacities as identified herein. The maximum number of addressable devices on an SLC shall not exceed 50.

c. Loading calculations for all Audible Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC) complete with the spare capacities as identified herein. The maximum load on a single NAC shall not exceed 1.2 amperes. Audible Notification Appliances (Horns) shall not be installed on the same circuit as the Visual Notification Appliances (Strobes).

d. Loading calculations for all Visual Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC) complete with the spare capacities as identified herein. The maximum load on a single NAC shall not exceed 1.2 amperes. Visual Notification Appliances (Strobes) shall not be installed on the same circuit as the Audible Notification Appliances (Horns).

Page 101: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 265900 - 4 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

3. Complete manufacturer’s catalog data including supervisory power usage, alarm power usage, physical dimensions, finish and mounting requirements.

4. Submit panel configuration and interconnection of modules and all other data as required to make an informed judgment regarding product suitability. At a minimum, data shall be submitted on the following:

a. Master system CPU including all fire detection control modules.

b. Circuit interface panels including all modules.

c. Power supplies, batteries and battery chargers.

d. Equipment enclosures.

e. Intelligent addressable analog devices including but not limited to manual pull stations, heat detectors, smoke detectors, alarm monitoring modules, and supervised control modules.

f. Conventional non-addressable devices as required. (All smoke detectors, heat detectors and manual pull stations shall be addressable.)

g. Audible and visual notification appliances.

h. Software and firmware as required providing a complete functioning system.

i. Wiring.

5. Data describing more than one type of item shall be clearly marked to indicate the type the contractor intends to provide for a given application. The reviewing authority will assume that all options not crossed out in submittal material will be furnished for the project. All submittal material shall be complete. Partial submittal will not be accepted.

6. The contractor shall submit copies of UL listing or FM approval data showing compatibility of the proposed device or appliance and the panel being provided.

7. Complete drawings including the following shall be submitted by the contractor for the proposed system:

a. Floor plans showing all initiating, end of line, supervisory, indicating appliances, and output control devices; including circuit interface panels, annunciators, remote panels and the main CPU locations. Raceways shall be shown, with the size identified, the number of conductors with type and size, meeting the percentage of allowable National Electric Code fill used.

Page 102: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 265900 - 5 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

b. Drawings shall indicate ambient sound levels used by the system layout designer for sound level calculations and mathematical justification for signal placement to meet the code requirement of 15 dBA above ambient for audible warning signals. (Refer to NFPA 72, Chapter 6 for the complete design criteria.)

c. Wiring diagrams showing points of connection and terminals used for all electrical connections to the system devices and panels.

7. A complete proposed system database including a description of all logic strings, control by event programming and point identification labels on a 3.5” high density floppy disk and in a formatted printed form, required for off site editing, uploading and downloading shall be submitted for evaluation by the owner. A programming manual shall accompany the submitted program and shall be adequate to allow understanding, operation and editing by the system owner.

8. Copies of required approved drawings by the “Authority Having Jurisdiction”.

9. Evidence that the technicians which are going to oversee the project including but limited to commissioning and testing the system are NICET Level 2 Certified.

C. For use in system test, three (3) complete “Operation and Maintenance Manuals” with three (3) sets of proposed installation drawings shall be submitted.

1. The following information shall be inscribed on the cover:

a. “OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL”

b. Building location.

c. The name and telephone number of the contractor, system manufacturer and system subcontractor (distributor).

2. The manual shall be legible and easily read with large drawings folded and contained in pockets. Included in the manual shall be circuit drawings, wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control of each item and a control sequence describing start up instructions. Included shall be installation instructions, maintenance instructions, safety precautions, test procedures, performance data, and software documentation.

D. Upon completion of the installation, three (3) sets of “as built” record drawings shall be submitted before final acceptance. Along with this, one (1) set of record drawings masters shall be provided on reproducible mylar film, uniformly sized as required for legibility and reproduction and on high-density floppy disks in an AutoCAD Version 12 format.

E. To avoid delays in the progress of the project, submittals proposing substitutions to the specified equipment shall be provided for evaluation within seven (7) days of the award

Page 103: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 265900 - 6 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

of the contract. A single evaluation of substitute submittal data will be provided for proposed substitutes.

1.05 System Function:

A. The system shall be a complete, electrically supervised, multiplex style fire detection system with intelligent analog alarm initiation, to be device addressable and annunciated as described and shown on the drawings.

1. The maximum number of devices on a single signaling circuit shall not exceed sixty with a capacity of sixty reporting system inputs and sixty system control outputs.

a. Devices shall be individually identifiable at the control panel for alarm and trouble indication. Smoke detectors shall be interrogated for sensitivity settings from the control panel, logged for sensitivity changes, indicating the requirement for cleaning, and testing by a single technician using the panel field test routine.

b. Sensitivity settings of individual detectors shall be automatically or manually adjustable from the control panel to reduce the incidence of false alarms caused by environmental conditions.

c. The analog signaling circuits shall be installed in the fire alarm control panel and in the remote panel panels shown on the drawings. Analog signaling circuits shall be selectable Style”4”, Style”6” or Style “7” wiring using LIM-1 loop isolator modules.

2. The system shall support intelligent analog smoke detection, conventional smoke detection, manual station, waterflow, supervisory, security, and status monitoring devices.

3. The panel shall be UL listed as a test instrument for the measurement of the sensitivity of connected intelligent analog ionization and photoelectric smoke detectors to comply with the testing requirements of NFPA 72.

a. The measurements shall be discrete voltage readings, accurate to .01 VDC. The readings shall be dynamic, providing a constant display of voltage shifts when in the sensitivity voltage list mode.

b. The control panel shall provide a display and a printed list of these sensitivity measurements as a permanent record of the required sensitivity testing.

c. When programmed, any system connected ionization or light refraction style smoke detector shall be capable of self adjustment to compensate for the accumulation of contaminates that would change the detector sensitivity in either a more or less sensitive direction. This adjustment shall keep the relationship between the sensing chamber voltage and the

Page 104: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 265900 - 7 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

programmed alarm threshold voltage constant to prevent false indications or failure to alarm in the presence of smoke.

4. The system shall annunciate a trouble condition when any smoke detector approaches 80% of its alarm threshold due to gradual contamination, signaling the need for service and eliminating unwanted alarms.

a. A trouble report shall annunciate the specific location of the smoke detector requiring service. All analog smoke detectors installed in the system shall include this feature.

5. Any intelligent analog smoke detector or conventional smoke detector zone shall include a selectable alarm verification capability. This feature shall provide automatic verification of smoke detector alarms as described by NFPA 72.

6. The system shall recognize initiating of an alarm and indicate the alarm condition in a degrade mode of operation, in the event of processor failure or the loss of system communications to the circuit interface panels.

a. Each circuit interface panel shall be capable of operation in its own degrade mode. In this mode, the system shall receive an alarm from any intelligent analog or conventional initiating device. It shall activate local indicating appliances and remote or auxiliary-connect circuits.

b. The system shall indicate a trouble condition during degrade mode operation and shall give a visual indication of an alarm condition.

c. Detector operation in the failsafe mode shall continue at the alarm threshold previously programmed. Systems returning detectors to a common default value in degrade mode shall not be acceptable.

7. All external circuits shall be listed as power limited circuits in accordance with Article 760 of the National Electric Code.

a. Power limitation shall be provided using on board self-restoring solid-state thermal devices. Units using fuses for this purpose and requiring board replacement or exchange are not considered equal.

8. The system shall provide a default operation program to allow reporting of alarms from installed devices before loading of custom system software.

9. The system shall report alarms from devices installed but not yet added to the system custom program. Alarm reports from these devices shall activate indicating appliance circuits.

10. The system shall perform time based control functions including automatic changes of specified smoke detector sensitivity settings.

Page 105: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 265900 - 8 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

a. “Time Based Control” functions shall be activated by specifying time periods or actual dates. It also shall provide the ability to control these functions on an exception basis using a holiday schedule.

11. The system shall provide a one person field test of either the complete system or a specified area, maintaining full function of areas not under test.

a. Field test shall be usable in a silent or audible mode. When in the audible mode, the signals shall audibly annunciate alarms, troubles and device types.

b. All field test activity shall be logged to the system printer and historical memory.

12. The system shall be provided with eight (8) levels of password protection with up to forty passwords.

13. The system shall be programmed in the field via a laptop computer. All programmed information shall be stored in nonvolatile memory after downloading into the control panel. No special programming terminal or “ROM” burning shall be required and the system shall continue in service during reprogramming. Systems requiring on line programming or not capable of mass uploading of software for off site documentation or editing will not be considered acceptable.

a. During program upload or download the system shall retain the capability for alarm reporting.

b. The system shall download to a PC for program editing. System program shall be stored on a floppy disk and all programming shall be multi-level password protected.

14. The system shall consist of a central architecture using a single centrally located control unit with distributed multiplex architecture using the centrally located control unit with interconnection to remote circuit interface panels containing any combination of plug in intelligent analog signaling circuits, conventional initiating device circuits and relays modules.

a. The remote circuit interface panels shall provide a power supply, microprocessor controlled battery charger, batteries and communication link to the main CPU through a high-speed 19.2K baud RS-485 network.

15. The system shall have the ability to support multiple CRT’s (Future) for the display of information in a format equal to that of the system logging printer.

16. The system shall support the use of a UL listed interactive video display terminal (Future) displaying system information in a format equal to the CRT and logging printer.

Page 106: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 265900 - 9 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

a. The VDT shall retain in local memory, four (4) pages of system activity, allowing scrolling of the data.

b. The VDT shall provide the ability to execute system commands such as Acknowledge, Silence and Reset. It shall list alarm, trouble, security violation and supervisory conditions with system diagnostic reports. The VDT shall be fully supervised.

17. The system shall have the ability to also support the use of a color interactive History Reporting video display terminal (Future) displaying information in a format equal to the CRT and logging printer (Future). Event types shall be displayed in different colors, i.e., Alarm - RED, Troubles - YELLOW, Supervisories - MAGENTA, Securities - CYAN, Acknowledged Events - GREEN.

a. The History Reporting terminal shall be capable of logging events to a hard disk drive for future retrieval. The number of events shall be limited only by the hard disk drive capacity.

b. The History Reporting terminal shall provide the ability to execute system commands such as Acknowledge, Silence, and Reset. It shall list all alarm, trouble, supervisory and security conditions, along with system diagnostic reports. The History Reporting terminal shall be fully supervised by the CPU.

c. As an option, a supervised parallel printer (Future) may be connected to the History Reporting terminal. This printer will print all system activity as well as History Log reports as required.

18. The system as installed shall be expandable to its predetermined maximum capacity of 240 initiation devices.

19. Each intelligent addressable device or conventional zone on the system shall be displayed at the fire alarm control panel and at all remote annunciation panels by a unique alphanumeric label (Custom Message) identifying its location. The owner’s representative and the local authority having jurisdiction shall approve the “Custom Messages” prior to system programming.

PART TWO - PRODUCTS

2.01 Manufacturers:

A. Match building existing fire alarm system.

B. The Manufacturer’s Representative shall provide evidence of completion of the required manufacturers’ training in their employment.

C. To ensure proper installation the Manufacturer’s Representative shall use individuals, which are NICET Level 2 Certified to commission and test this system. As part of one’s

Page 107: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 265900 - 10 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

submittal, the Manufacturer’s Representative shall provide evidence of NICET Level 2 technicians in their employment.

D. The representative’s technician shall supervise installation, software documentation, adjustment, preliminary testing, final testing and certification of the system. The technician shall provide the required instruction to the owner’s personnel in the system operation, maintenance and programming.

2.02 Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP):

A. Utilize the existing Fire Alarm Control

2.03 Intelligent Smoke Detectors

A. Furnish and install where indicated on the drawings, intelligent, multi-sensor (photo-electric-thermal), analog smoke detectors with features and characteristics as follows:

1. The detector shall be Application Specific Detectors (ASD). Each smoke detector shall include a microprocessor that automatically checks the detector’s calibration, performs sensitivity checks, sensitivity adjustments, monitor’s the detector’s sampling chamber for the build up of contaminants and application specific detection software to speed detection of a real fire phenomena and reject deceptive phenomena.

2. The smoke chamber of the detector shall effectively manage light dissipation and extraneous reflections from dust particles or other airborne contaminants in such a way as to maintain stable consistent detector operation. The detector shall incorporate FirePrint software technology enabling the detector to be programmed for the environment in which it is installed. The system shall automatically set the detector’s “Alarm” and “Pre-Alarm” points as well as calculation factors for weighting input from the detector’s sensors. The detector shall operate at set factory defined default if the operator or installer fail to program the detector.

3. The detector shall be capable of bi-directional communication with the control panel and shall be dynamically supervised and uniquely identifiable by the control panel. The control panel shall be capable of analyzing the signal for the detector’s analog value for calibration, sensitivity and address identification. These values shall be displayed upon command from the control panel as well as the detector’s application program setting. The detector’s sensitivity or application setting shall be individually controlled at the control panel. Should the detector’s sensitivity voltage shift beyond an acceptable level and remain there for a predetermined duration, a detector trouble signal shall be annunciated at the control panel identifying the detector.

4. Each detector shall contain a multi-color LED indicator which shall flash Green every four seconds indicating a “Normal Condition”, Amber to indicate a “Detector Fault”, and Red when instructed by the Fire Alarm Control Panel to indicate an “Alarm Condition”.

Page 108: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 265900 - 11 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

5. The detector shall be addressed, tested and programmed prior to installation using a UL listed programmer/tester. The detector readout shall yield a discreet electrical value for status tracking and logging for determining maintenance and cleaning requirements.

a. The control panel shall provide a detector “Sensitivity” readout from the detector without removal from the pluggable base.

b. Detectors not specifically listed for sensitivity testing from the control panel are not acceptable due to the expense involved with manual testing as required by NFPA 72.

6. The detector shall be suitable for two-wire operation and two-way communications on the intelligent analog signaling circuit.

a. Address and sensitivity assignments shall be programmed electronically and devices requiring dipswitches, rotary switches, staples or jumpers are not acceptable.

7. The detectors furnished shall be listed for use in environments as covered by Factory Mutual, UL (UROX) and shall be installed according to the requirements of NFPA 72 for open area coverage.

2.04 Heat Detectors, Intelligent Rate Compensated

A. Furnish and install where indicated in the drawings, heat detectors with features and characteristics as follows:

1. Detectors shall be of the intelligent, rate compensated type rated at 135 degrees. Detectors shall be constructed to compensate for the thermal inertia inherent in conventional type detectors due to the thermal mass, and alarm at the set point of 135 degrees Fahrenheit.

2. The detector shall be addressed, tested and programmed prior to installation using a UL listed programmer/tester.

3. The detector shall be suitable for two-wire operation and two-way communications on the intelligent analog signaling circuit.

a. The detector shall display a steady LED when in the alarm-state when the system is operating from normal or standby power.

4. Detectors shall incorporate triple technology microprocessor chips including analog, digital and EEROM technologies on the single device.

a. Address assignments shall be set electronically and devices requiring dipswitches, rotary switches, staples or jumpers are not acceptable.

5. The detectors furnished shall have a listed spacing for coverage up to 2,500 square feet for use in environments as covered by Factory Mutual and UL

Page 109: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 265900 - 12 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

(UQGS) and shall be installed according to the requirements of NFPA 72 for open area coverage.

2.05 Universal Detector Bases

A. Detector bases shall be low profile twist lock type with screw clamp terminals and self-wiping contacts. Bases shall be installed on an industry standard, 4” square or octagonal electrical outlet box.

1. Where selective localized control of electrical devices is required for system operation, furnish and install type DB-X3RS detector base with software programmed addressable relay integral to the base. The relay shall switch electrical loads, as indicated on the drawings.

2. The detector bases shall be compatible with, and allow the installation of, detectors operating on the flame, ionization, photoelectric or rate compensated heat principles of detection.

2.06 Intelligent Manual Stations

A. Provide single action intelligent manual stations.

1. Station shall be equipped with terminal strip and pressure style screw terminals for the connection of field wiring.

2. The manual stations shall be addressable and identifiable by the master fire alarm control panel.

a. Address assignments shall be set electronically and reside within the station in non-volatile memory. Devices using rotary switches, pins, jumpers or staples are not acceptable.

3. Manual stations identified on the drawings as “Waterproof” (WP) shall be provided with the manufacturer’s prescribed, model SB-5R, matching baked red enamel, surface outlet box and with the model STI-1250 protective cover.

2.07 Intelligent System Interface Module

A. Furnish and install, for the monitoring of contact type initiation devices and for the control of electrical devices where required, intelligent analog signaling circuit interface module. Modules shall be supplied to meet the project requirements as follows:

1. A single circuit intelligent signaling circuit interface module for monitoring alarm, trouble, supervisory security or status contact type devices, type TRI-S.

2. Unit as above with form “C” software programmable control contacts for the management of specified electrical loads as required by this specification type TRI-R.

Page 110: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 265900 - 13 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

3. Dual circuit units as described above, type TRI-D.

B. The module shall be addressed, tested and programmed prior to installation using a UL listed programmer/tester.

C. The module shall be suitable for two-wire, two-way communications on the intelligent analog signaling circuit.

1. The module shall display a steady LED for each circuit, in the normal power or standby power condition, when in the alarm state or during control circuit activation.

D. Modules shall incorporate triple technology microprocessor chips including analog, digital and EEROM technologies on the single device.

1. Address assignments shall be set electronically and devices requiring dipswitches, rotary switches, staples or jumpers are not acceptable.

2.08 Notification Appliance Devices

A. Furnish and install where shown on the drawings, audible signals with the following characteristics and capacities:

1. The audible signal shall be an electronic type providing a “Synchronized” nationally and internationally recognized Temporal Tone meeting the requirement of NFPA 72 section 3-7.2.

2. The audible signal installed in all tenant rooms shall be an electronic type producing an electronic signal rated at 92 dBA measured at 10 foot while only requiring 15mA.

B. Furnish and install where shown on the drawings, visual signals with the following characteristics and capacities:

1. Visual notification appliance signals shall be UL 1971 Listed and be complete with “The Adapter” feature providing four field selectable candela strobe settings. These shall be identified as 15/75, 30/75, 75 and 110 candela.

a. For this contact the visual appliances shall be set at the candela setting as identified in Chapter 6 of NFPA 72.

b. It shall be this contractor’s responsibility to submit Drawings with one’s submittal identifying the Candela Rating of each Visual Notification Appliance.

2. The visual signals, a Xenon strobe, shall have a minimum repetition rate of 1 HZ, a maximum duty-cycle of 40% with a pulse duration of .2 seconds and produce an unfiltered or clear filtered white light.

3. All visual signals shall be “synchronized” so that they flash in unison.

Page 111: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 265900 - 14 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

4. Visual signals shall be mounted at a height of 80 inches above the highest level of the finish floor or six inches below the ceiling, whichever is lower.

C. The “Synchronized” Strobe and Combination Horn/Strobe shall operate on a single pair of wires. It shall be possible to program these devices such that the operator can “Silence” the Horns while the Strobes continues to “Flash”.

D. The evacuation signals shall be available in flush, semi-flush or surface versions as required for signal locations shown on the contract documents.

1. Signals shall be available in audible only, visual only or a combination audible/visual to satisfy all the required project applications.

a. The “synchronized” combination Audible /Visual Unit shall be a Siemens model U-MHST-MCS. These shall mount to either a 1-gang, 2-gang or 4” square standard electrical outlet box.

b. The “synchronized” Visual Unit shall be a Siemens model U-MCS. These shall mount mounting to either a 1-gang, 2-gang or 4” square standard electrical outlet box.

c. The “synchronized” Audible Unit shall be a Siemens model U-MHST mounting to either a 1-gang, 2-gang or 4” square standard electrical outlet box.

d. Weatherproof combination Audible/Visual Units shall be a Siemens model U-HN-S17-1, shall be “Listed” for outdoor applications and included the model FWB-2 Weatherproof Surface Back Box.

E. All Weatherproof Notification Appliances on a Floor and/or Level shall be installed on a “Dedicated” NAC. Weatherproof Audible and Weatherproof Visual Notification Appliances shall not be installed on the same circuit.

F. All notification appliances shown on the drawings to be provided with a “Wire Guard” (WG) shall include the model STI-1223 protective cover each with two (2) STI-3100 conduit spacers. The Electrical Contractor shall provide all mounting hardware for these devices.

2.09 Auxiliary Devices

A. Sprinkler Waterflow and Valve Monitoring Switches: The sprinkler system alarm and monitoring switches shall be provided and installed by others, wired by this contractor.

B. Ansul Alarm Switch: The Ansul system alarm switches shall be provided and installed by others, wired by this contractor.

2.10 Fire Alarm Wire and Cable

A. Fire Alarm Power Branch Circuits: Building wire as specified in Section 16123.

Page 112: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 265900 - 15 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

B. Initiating, Signal Circuits, Data and 24 VDC Power Cables: Building wire as specified in Section 16123. Non-power limited, fire-protective signaling cable, copper conductor, 150-volt insulation rated 60 degree C; Power limited fire-protective signaling cable, copper conductor, 300 volts insulation rated 105 degree C.

1. Each conductor shall be identified as shown on the drawings at each with wire markers at every splice and terminal point. Attach permanent wire markers within 2 inches of the wire termination. Marker legends shall be visible.

2. All wiring shall be supplied and installed in compliance with the requirements of the National Electric Code, NFPA 70, Article 760, and that of the manufacturer.

3. Wiring for the analog loop circuits and the network data circuits shall be 18 AWG twisted and shielded FPL type, West Penn Wire number 975.

4. Wiring for the visual appliances, audible appliances and remote annunciator power circuits shall be a 14 AWG type FPL, West Penn Wire number 994.

5. All splices shall be made using solderless connectors. All connectors shall be installed in conformance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

6. Crimp-on type spade lugs shall be used for terminations of stranded conductors to binder screw or stud type terminals. Spade lugs shall have upset legs and insulation sleeves sized for the conductors.

7. A consistent color code for fire alarm system conductors throughout the installation.

C. The contractor shall submit for approval prior to installation of wire, a proposed color code for system conductors to allow rapid identification of circuit types.

D. Wiring within sub panels shall be arranged and routed to allow accessibility to equipment for adjustment and maintenance.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.01. System Operation

A. Activation of any fire alarm initiating device shall cause the following actions and indications:

1. Display a custom message describing the device originating the alarm condition at the Fire Alarm Control Panel and at all Remote Annunciators.

2. The audible notification appliances shall sound a “synchronized” temporal pattern (Code 3) alert tone, this as outlined by NFPA 72 section 3-7.2, on all the audible devices throughout the building.

Page 113: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 265900 - 16 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

3. The visual devices shall flash throughout the building. The visual notification appliance’s flash rate shall be synchronized with the other visual notification appliances installed in the same area.

4. Audible signals shall be silencable and the visual signals shall stop flashing by operation of an alarm acknowledge and silence switch at the fire alarm control panel or at any remote Annunciator. The alarm indication shall be transferred to a visual indicator on the control panel and at all remote annunciators. The alarm signals shall resound and strobes will continue to flash upon receipt of a subsequent alarm condition, reported by a different device.

5. A signal dedicated to sprinkler system water flow alarm shall not be silencable while the sprinkler system is flowing at a rate of flow equal to a single head.

6. Shut down all air handling units within the smoke zone of alarm origin. For this, this contractor shall coordinate with the B.M.S. contractor.

7. The activation of any air duct smoke shall also cause its associated Air Handler to shutdown.

8. The “ALARM” shall be transmitted to a UL Central Station.

9. Close all smoke doors and smoke dampers shown on the drawings to prevent the spread of smoke.

10. Record within the non-volatile system historical memory the occurrence of the event, the time and date of occurrence and the device initiating the event.

B. Activation of any supervisory circuit, supervised valve closure, air pressure abnormal, low temperature, fire pump trouble) shall cause the following actions and indications:

1. Display the origin of the supervisory condition report at the Fire Alarm Control Panel and at all the Remote Fire Alarm Annunciators.

2. Activate supervisory audible and visual signals as indicated on the drawings. Audible signals shall be silencable from the fire alarm control panel or at any remote Annunciator by an alarm acknowledge switch. The supervisory indication shall be transferred to a visual indicator on the control panel and at all remote annunciators. The supervisory signals shall resound for a subsequent supervisory condition, reported by a different device.

3. The “SUPERVISORY ALARM” shall be transmitted to a UL Central Station.

4. Record the occurrence of the event, the time of occurrence and the device initiating the event.

C. Receipt of a trouble report (primary power loss, open or grounded initiating or signaling circuit wiring, open, grounded or shorted indication system wiring, device communication failure, digital communicator failure, battery disconnect, power supply failure) at the fire alarm control panel shall cause the following actions and indications:

Page 114: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 265900 - 17 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

1. Display the origin of the trouble condition and report at the Fire Alarm Control Panel and at all local Remote Fire Alarm Annunciators.

2. Activate trouble audible and visual signals at the control panel or at any remote Annunciator as indicated on the drawings. Audible signals shall be silencable from the fire alarm control panel or at any remote Annunciator by a trouble acknowledge switch. The trouble indication shall be transferred to a visual indicator on the control panel and all remote annunciators. The trouble signals shall resound for a subsequent trouble condition reported by a different device.

3. The “TROUBLE” alarm shall be transmitted to a UL Central Station.

a. Off site trouble reports for primary system power failure shall be automatically delayed for a period of time equal to 25% of the system standby battery capacity to eliminate spurious reports as a result of power fluctuations.

4. Record the occurrence of the event, the time of occurrence and the device initiating the event.

D. The fire alarm control panel and all remote fire alarm control panels shall be provided with an alpha-numeric display that will provide complete system annunciation and control (refer to the section titled “Products” of this specification for complete operation of this panel). All panels shall have sixteen (16) programmable switches, which can be programmed to customize the system.

1. One switch shall be programmed to provide a “Drill Switch” in which all audible and visual devices shall activate throughout the building.

2. The other fifteen (15) shall be programmed to meet the specific requirements of the owner and the local AHJ. All unused switches shall be marked as spare.

3.02 Installation

A. GENERAL

1. Install products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

2. Install manual station 44 inches above floor.

3. Install audible and visual signal devices such that measured from the bottom the device shall be 80 inches above floor.

4. Use size as previously specified for the fire alarm system installing all wiring in conduit.

5. Mount end-of-line device box with last device or separate box adjacent to last device in circuit.

Page 115: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 265900 - 18 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

6. Make conduit and wiring connections to sprinkler flow switches, sprinkler valve tamper switches, fire pump, elevator controllers, fans, HVAC starters and to the telephone terminal board.

7. Automatic Detector Installation shall conform to NFPA 72.

8. Wiring connections shall be made by the Contractor as shown on drawings furnished by the representative of the equipment manufacturer. Power shall not be applied to the system until the representative of the manufacturer has approved the connections to the control equipment.

9. The system shall be installed in a manner approved by the Pennsylvania Department of Labor and Industry and National Electric Code utilizing conduit or approved metal raceway. Power connections shall be made through a fused disconnect switch that is lockable, painted red, and tagged “Fire Alarm Fuses” as specified herein.

10. Do not install heat and/or smoke detector closer than 12 inches to any part of any lighting fixture nor closer than 48 inches to any part of air supply diffuser.

B. CONDUIT GUIDELINES

1. Use rigid steel or intermediate metal where subject to mechanical damage, installed in concrete floors or walls, installed exposed to the weather or installed 4 feet or less above the floor. Electrical metallic tubing may be used elsewhere when connecting electrical equipment 2 feet or less apart and when entering electrical equipment at the top, 4 feet minimum above floor.

2. Install a 14 gauge galvanized, pull-wire or 1/8 inch polyethylene rope in conduit installed for future use, and seal the ends.

3. Install concealed conduits as directly as possible and with bend radii as long as possible. Install exposed conduit parallel with or at right angles to building lines. Where conditions permit, maintain continuous exposed horizontal runs along walls at minimum height of 9 feet above floor level or grade.

4. Permanently label or marked at both ends with conduit number of each wire as shown on the drawings.

5. Make elbows, offsets and bends uniform and symmetrical. Bend conduit with approved bending devices.

6. Cut conduit ends square, ream and remove burrs. Conduit shall be clean, dry, and free of debris. Immediately after installation, plug or cap exposed ends with standard accessories until wires are pulled.

7. Use galvanized steel lock nuts for attachments to enclosures except threaded hubs may be used where permitted. Threadless fittings will not be permitted for rigid conduit. Use Erikson type couplings with running threads.

Page 116: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 265900 - 19 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

8. Use one-hole clamps equipped with clamp backs to secure conduits, or equivalent.

9. Install without moisture traps where ever possible. Where practicable, provide drain holes in pull boxes or fittings at low points in systems and remove burrs from drilled holes.

10. Use flexible conduit to make connections to equipment subject to vibrations. Use liquid tight flexible metal conduit where conduit and fittings are installed outdoors or exposed to moisture or chemical fumes indoors. Flexible conduit may be used in lengths not exceeding four feet for other equipment, with the approval of the acceptance inspector.

11. Set up joints in conduit installed in concrete, underground, or exposed to weather, with high temperature, anti-seize, conductive thread lubricant and sealant.

12. Seal openings around conduit at exterior wall penetrations and penetrations of walls forming boundaries between adjoining ventilation zones, using specified sealant. make all seals waterproof and finish flush with surrounding wall surfaces.

13. Use hangars with 3/8 inch rods for 2 inch conduit or smaller. If conduit is suspended on rods more than 2 feet long, conduit shall be rigidly braced to prevent horizontal motion or swaying.

14. Apply sealing compound in conduit at box or enclosure nearest exterior wall penetration on both sides of wall.

15. Where routing is parallel with hot water or steam pipes, conduits shall not be installed within six inches of the pipe covering. When routing is not parallel with pipes, it is acceptable to install within six inches providing they do not touch the pipes.

16. Use PVC coated rigid steel conduit below on-grade floor slabs and underground runs.

17. Install PVC coated rigid steel conduit in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Coating damaged during handling or installation shall be repaired using PVC paint recommended by the conduit manufacturer.

C. BOXES, ENCLOSURES AND WIRING DEVICES

1. Boxes shall be installed plumb and firmly in position.

2. Extension rings with blank covers shall be installed on junction boxes where required.

3. Junction boxes served by concealed conduit shall be flush mounted.

Page 117: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 265900 - 20 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

4. Upon initial installation, all wiring outlets, junction, pull and outlet boxes shall have dust covers installed. Dust covers shall not be removed until wiring installation when permanent dust covers or devices are installed.

5. “Fire Alarm System” decal shall be applied to all junction box covers.

D. CONDUCTORS

1. Each conductor shall be identified as shown on the drawings at each with wire markers at every splice and terminal point. Attach the wire markers within 2 inches of the wire termination. Marker legends shall be visible.

2. Permanently label or mark each conductor at both ends with alpha-numeric wire markers.

3. Use the following for fire alarm system conductors:

a. Alarm initiation devices (detectors, manual stations), supervisory devices and status devices; twisted shielded pair #18.

b. Signals; one pair #14awg.

c. AC power; black, white, green #12awg.

d. Other circuits; different from the preceding colors, wire gauge as required.

4. Color tape shall be used on both ends of circuits to provide unique color codes for each type of circuit, for existing wiring and for expansion of existing systems.

5. All wiring for the fire detection and alarm system shall be supplied and installed in accordance with national and local building codes.

E. DEVICES

1. Relays and other devices to be mounted in auxiliary panels are to be securely fastened to avoid false indications and failures due to shock or vibration.

2. Wiring within sub-panels shall be arranged and routed to allow accessibility to equipment for adjustment and maintenance.

F. SPLICES AND CABLE TERMINATIONS

1. All splices shall be made using solderless connectors as described in part one of this section. All connectors shall be installed in conformance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

2. Crimp-on type spade lugs shall be used for terminations of stranded conductors to binder screw or stud type terminals. Spade lugs shall have upset legs and insulation sleeves sized for the conductors.

Page 118: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 265900 - 21 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

G. CERTIFICATES OF COMPLIANCE

1. Complete and submit to the project engineer and/or the owner in accordance with NFPA 72.

3.03 Field Quality Control

A. TESTING, GENERAL

1. A NICET Level 2 certified technician shall perform all testing.

2. All intelligent analog devices shall be tested for correct address and sensitivity using test equipment specifically designed for that purpose. These devices and their bases shall be tagged with adhesive tags located in an area not visible when installed, showing the system address, initials of the installing technician and date.

3. Wiring runs shall be tested for continuity, short circuits and grounds before system is energized. Resistance, current and voltage readings shall be made as work progresses.

a. A systematic record shall be maintained of all readings using schedules or charts of tests and measurements. Areas shall be provided on the logging form for readings, dates and witnesses.

b. The acceptance inspector shall be notified before the start of the required tests. All items found at variance with the drawings or this specification during testing or inspection by the acceptance inspector, shall be corrected.

c. Test reports shall be delivered to the acceptance inspector as completed.

4. All test equipment, instruments, tools and labor required to conduct the system test shall be made available by the installing contractor. The following equipment shall be a minimum for conducting the tests:

a. Ladders and scaffolds as required to access all installed equipment.

b. Multimeter for reading voltage. current and resistance.

c. Intelligent device programmer/tester.

d. Laptop computer with programming software for any required program revisions.

e. Two way radios, flashlights, smoke generation devices and supplies.

f. A system printer for connection to the system with spare printer paper.

Page 119: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 265900 - 22 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

g. A manufacturer recommended device for measuring air flow through air duct smoke detector sampling assemblies.

h. Decibel meter.

5. In addition to the testing specified to be performed by the installing contractor and NICET Level 2 technician, the installation shall be subject to test by the acceptance inspector.

6. System wiring inclusive of all fire alarm circuits shall be tested for continuity, grounds, and short circuits.

B. ACCEPTANCE TESTING

1. A written acceptance test procedure (ATP) for testing the fire alarm system components and installation will be prepared by the engineer in accordance with NFPA 72 and this specification. The contractor shall be responsible for the performance of the ATP, demonstrating the function of the system and verifying the correct operation of all system components, circuits, and programming.

2. A program matrix shall be prepared by the installing contractor referencing each alarm input to every output function affected as a result of an alarm condition on that input. In the case of outputs programmed using more complex logic functions involving “any”, “or”, “not”, “count”, “time”, and “timer” statements; the complete output equation shall be referenced in the matrix.

3. A complete listing of all device labels for alphanumeric annunciator displays and logging printers shall be prepared by the installing contractor prior to the ATP.

4. The acceptance inspector shall use the system record drawings in combination with the documents specified under this specification during the testing procedure to verify operation as programmed. In conducting the ATP, the acceptance inspector shall request demonstration of any or all input and output functions. The items tested shall include but not be limited to the following:

a. System wiring shall be tested to demonstrate correct system response and correct subsequent system operation in the event of:

(1) Open, Shorted and grounded intelligent analog signaling circuit

(2) Intelligent device removal

(3) Primary power or battery disconnected

(4) Incorrect device at address.

b. System evacuation alarm notification appliances shall be demonstrated as follows:

(1) All alarm notification appliances actuate as programmed.

Page 120: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 265900 - 23 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

(2) Audibility and visibility at required levels.

c. System indications shall be demonstrated as follows:

(1) Correct message display for each alarm input at the control panel and at each remote alphanumeric display (Remote Annunciator).

(2) Correct printer logging for all system activity.

d. System off-site reporting functions shall be demonstrated as follows:

(1) Correct zone transmitted for each alarm input.

(2) Trouble signals received for disconnect.

e. Secondary power capabilities shall be demonstrated as follows:

(1) System primary power shall be disconnected for a period of time as specified herein. At the end of that period, an alarm condition shall be created and the system shall perform as specified for a period as specified.

(2) System primary power shall be restored for forty eight hours and system charging current shall be normal trickle charge for a fully charged battery bank.

(3) System battery voltages and charging currents shall be checked at the fire alarm control panel using the test codes and displayed on the LCD display.

5. In the event of system failure to perform as specified and programmed during the ATP procedure, at the discretion of the acceptance inspector, the test shall be terminated.

a. The installing contractor shall retest the system, correcting all deficiencies and providing test documentation to the acceptance inspector.

b. The acceptance inspector may elect to require the complete ATP to be performed again if, in his opinion, modifications to the system hardware or software warrant complete resetting.

3.04 Service Maintenance Agreement

A. The equipment manufacturer or the manufacturer’s authorized representative shall prepare a proposal for an annual Service Maintenance Agreement. This respective service agreement shall provide, at a minimum, the following:

Page 121: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 265900 - 24 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

1. Complete annual system testing in accordance with NFPA 72 and/or other standard required by the AHJ, including the issuing of written reports each time the system is serviced, and an annual configuration report. Any conditions, which would interfere with the proper operation of the system, such as material or equipment blocking detection or signaling equipment will be noted on the service report.

2. Emergency response, 24 hours a day, seven days a week, due to system failure shall be included for the term of the agreement. The service technician shall contact the owner or the owner’s representative within two hours of the request for service and be on site, if required, within four hours. Requests for emergency service due to causes other than system failure are not included in the agreement.

3. All labor and material required in maintaining the system in proper operation. Excluded in any and all material and equipment required for additions to or repair of the system due to renovations to the building or damage to the system from vandalism, fire or any act of God.

4. Software updates as needed to meet the requirements of UL or other AHJ shall be provided and installed under this agreement.

5. A labor rate schedule for the service technician, for work not included in the agreement. If applicable, indicate mileage rates and per diem charges per person.

6. Training of the owner or the owner’s representative(s) in the proper operation of system during normal business hours, for up to four annually, at the owner’s request.

3.05 Documentation

A. System documentation shall be furnished to the owner and shall include but not be limited to the following:

1. System record drawings and wiring details including one set of reproducible masters and drawings on 3 ½ inch floppy disks in a DXF format suitable for use in a CAD drafting program.

2. System operation, installation and maintenance manuals.

3. Written documentation for all logic modules as programmed for system operation with a matrix showing interaction of all input signals with output commands.

4. Documentation of system voltage, current and resistance readings taken during the installation, testing and ATP phases of the system installation.

5. System program showing system functions, controls and labeling of equipment and devices. Also provide a 3.5” floppy diskette with system file.

3.06 Services

Page 122: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 265900 - 25 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

A. The contractor shall warrant the entire system against mechanical and electrical defects for a period of one (1) year from the date of final acceptance and as described in the contract general conditions. This period shall begin upon completed certification and test of the system or upon first beneficial use of the system, whichever is earlier.

B. The manufacturer’s representative shall furnish training as follows for a minimum of four employees of the system user:

1. Training in the receipt, handling and acknowledgment of alarms.

2. Training in the system operation including manual control of output functions from the system control panel.

3. Training in the testing of the system including logging of detector sensitivity, field test of devices and response to common troubles.

4. The total training requirement shall be a minimum of 4 hours and shall be sufficient to cover all items specified.

End of Section

Page 123: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 311000 - 1 SITE CLEARING

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

SECTION 311000

SITE CLEARING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Protecting existing vegetation to remain. 2. Removing existing vegetation. 3. Clearing and grubbing. 4. Stripping and stockpiling topsoil. 5. Removing above- and below-grade site improvements. 6. Disconnecting, capping, or sealing site utilities. 7. Temporary erosion and sedimentation control.

1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.3 MATERIAL OWNERSHIP

A. Except for materials indicated to be stockpiled or otherwise remain Owner's property, cleared materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site.

1.4 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities during site-clearing operations.

1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed trafficways if required by Owner or authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Salvageable Improvements: Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and store on Owner's premises where indicated.

C. Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before site clearing.

D. Do not commence site clearing operations until temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control and plant-protection measures are in place.

Page 124: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 311000 - 2 SITE CLEARING

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

E. Tree- and Plant-Protection Zones: Protect according to requirements in Section 015639 "Temporary Tree and Plant Protection."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Satisfactory Soil Material: Requirements for satisfactory soil material are specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."

1. Obtain approved borrow soil material off-site when satisfactory soil material is not available on-site.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during construction.

B. Verify that trees, shrubs, and other vegetation to remain or to be relocated have been flagged and that protection zones have been identified and enclosed according to requirements in Section 015639 "Temporary Tree and Plant Protection."

C. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction.

1. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner.

3.2 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL

A. Provide temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways, according to erosion- and sedimentation-control Drawings and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Verify that flows of water redirected from construction areas or generated by construction activity do not enter or cross protection zones.

C. Inspect, maintain, and repair erosion- and sedimentation-control measures during construction until permanent vegetation has been established.

D. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls, and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during removal.

Page 125: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 311000 - 3 SITE CLEARING

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

3.3 TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION

A. Protect trees and plants remaining on-site according to requirements in Section 015639 "Temporary Tree and Plant Protection."

B. Repair or replace trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or be relocated that are damaged by construction operations according to requirements in Section 015639 "Temporary Tree and Plant Protection."

3.4 EXISTING UTILITIES

A. Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap utilities indicated to be removed or abandoned in place.

1. Arrange with utility companies to shut off indicated utilities.

B. Interrupting Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others, unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission.

C. Removal of underground utilities is included in earthwork sections; in applicable fire suppression, plumbing, HVAC, electrical, communications, electronic safety and security, and utilities sections; and in Section 024116 "Structure Demolition" and Section 024119 "Selective Demolition."

3.5 CLEARING AND GRUBBING

A. Remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, and other vegetation to permit installation of new construction.

1. Grind down stumps and remove roots larger than 3 inches (75 mm) in diameter, obstructions, and debris to a depth of 18 inches (450 mm) below exposed subgrade.

2. Use only hand methods or air spade for grubbing within protection zones.

B. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated.

1. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding a loose depth of 8 inches (200 mm), and compact each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground.

3.6 TOPSOIL STRIPPING

A. Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil.

Page 126: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 311000 - 4 SITE CLEARING

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

B. Strip topsoil to depth indicated on Drawings in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil or other waste materials.

C. Stockpile topsoil away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil or other materials. Grade and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust and erosion by water.

3.7 SITE IMPROVEMENTS

A. Remove existing above- and below-grade improvements as indicated and necessary to facilitate new construction.

3.8 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS

A. Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials, and waste materials including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

B. Separate recyclable materials produced during site clearing from other nonrecyclable materials. Store or stockpile without intermixing with other materials, and transport them to recycling facilities. Do not interfere with other Project work.

END OF SECTION 311000

Page 127: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 312000 - 1 EARTH MOVING

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

SECTION 312000

EARTH MOVING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Excavating and filling for rough grading the Site. 2. Preparing subgrades for slabs-on-grade, walks, pavements, turf and grasses and plants. 3. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures. 4. Drainage course for concrete slabs-on-grade. 5. Subbase course for concrete walks and pavements. 6. Subbase course and base course for asphalt paving. 7. Excavating and backfilling trenches for utilities and pits for buried utility structures.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Backfill: Soil material used to fill an excavation.

1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to support sides of pipe.

2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench.

B. Base Course: Aggregate layer placed between the subbase course and hot-mix asphalt paving.

C. Bedding Course: Aggregate layer placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe.

D. Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill.

E. Drainage Course: Aggregate layer supporting the slab-on-grade that also minimizes upward capillary flow of pore water.

F. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and dimensions indicated.

1. Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions as directed by Architect. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work.

2. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions without direction by Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Architect, shall be without additional compensation.

Page 128: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 312000 - 2 EARTH MOVING

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

G. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades.

H. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface.

I. Subbase Course: Aggregate layer placed between the subgrade and base course for hot-mix asphalt pavement, or aggregate layer placed between the subgrade and a cement concrete pavement or a cement concrete or hot-mix asphalt walk.

J. Subgrade: Uppermost surface of an excavation or the top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, drainage course, or topsoil materials.

K. Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables as well as underground services within buildings.

1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct preexcavation conference at Project site.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Material test reports.

1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before beginning earth-moving operations.

B. Do not commence earth-moving operations until plant-protection measures specified in Section 015639 "Temporary Tree and Plant Protection" are in place.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOIL MATERIALS

A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available from excavations.

B. Satisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM according to ASTM D 2487, or a combination of these groups; free of rock or gravel larger than 2 inches (50 mm) in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter.

C. Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GC, SC, CL, ML, OL, CH, MH, OH, and PT according to ASTM D 2487, or a combination of these groups.

Page 129: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 312000 - 3 EARTH MOVING

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

1. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of optimum moisture content at time of compaction.

D. Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940/D 2940M; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch (37.5-mm) sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.

E. Base Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 294/D 2940M 0; with at least 95 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch (37.5-mm) sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.

F. Engineered Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940/D 2940M; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch (37.5-mm) sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.

G. Bedding Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940/D 2940M; except with 100 percent passing a 1-inch (25-mm) sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.

H. Drainage Course: Narrowly graded mixture of washed crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch(37.5-mm) sieve and zero to 5 percent passing a No. 8 (2.36-mm) sieve.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, 6 inches (150 mm) wide and 4 mils (0.1 mm)thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility; colored to comply with local practice or requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) wide and 4 mils (0.1 mm) thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility, with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches (750 mm) deep; colored to comply with local practice or requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earth-moving operations.

B. Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls during earth-moving operations.

Page 130: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 312000 - 4 EARTH MOVING

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

C. Protect subgrades and foundation soils from freezing temperatures and frost. Remove temporary protection before placing subsequent materials.

3.2 EXCAVATION, GENERAL

A. Unclassified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface and subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified excavated materials may include rock, soil materials, and obstructions. No changes in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time will be authorized for rock excavation or removal of obstructions.

1. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials and rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials.

3.3 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES

A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). If applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections.

1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work.

2. Pile Foundations: Stop excavations 6 to 12 inches (150 to 300 mm) above bottom of pile cap before piles are placed. After piles have been driven, remove loose and displaced material. Excavate to final grade, leaving solid base to receive concrete pile caps.

3. Excavation for Underground Tanks, Basins, and Mechanical or Electrical Utility Structures: Excavate to elevations and dimensions indicated within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). Do not disturb bottom of excavations intended as bearing surfaces.

B. Excavations at Edges of Tree- and Plant-Protection Zones:

1. Excavate by hand or with an air spade to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades. If excavating by hand, use narrow-tine spading forks to comb soil and expose roots. Do not break, tear, or chop exposed roots. Do not use mechanical equipment that rips, tears, or pulls roots.

2. Cut and protect roots according to requirements in Section 015639 "Temporary Tree and Plant Protection."

3.4 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS

A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades.

Page 131: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 312000 - 5 EARTH MOVING

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

3.5 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES

A. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations.

B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide the following clearance on each side of pipe or conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches (300 mm) higher than top of pipe or conduit unless otherwise indicated.

1. Clearance: 12 inches (300 mm) each side of pipe or conduit.

C. Trench Bottoms: Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and support of pipes and conduit. Shape subgrade to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. Remove projecting stones and sharp objects along trench subgrade.

1. Excavate trenches 6 inches (150 mm) deeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding bearing material to allow for bedding course.

D. Trenches in Tree- and Plant-Protection Zones:

1. Hand-excavate to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades. Use narrow-tine spading forks to comb soil and expose roots. Do not break, tear, or chop exposed roots. Do not use mechanical equipment that rips, tears, or pulls roots.

2. Do not cut main lateral roots or taproots; cut only smaller roots that interfere with installation of utilities.

3. Cut and protect roots according to requirements in Section 015639 "Temporary Tree and Plant Protection."

3.6 SUBGRADE INSPECTION

A. Proof-roll subgrade below the building slabs and pavements with a pneumatic-tired dump truck to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or saturated subgrades.

B. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or construction activities, as directed by Architect, without additional compensation.

3.7 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION

A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean concrete fill, with 28-day compressive strength of 2500 psi (17.2 MPa), may be used when approved by Architect.

1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction, pipe, or conduit as directed by Architect.

Page 132: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 312000 - 6 EARTH MOVING

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

3.8 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS

A. Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.

1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees.

3.9 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL

A. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

B. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits.

C. Trenches under Footings: Backfill trenches excavated under footings and within 18 inches (450 mm) of bottom of footings with satisfactory soil; fill with concrete to elevation of bottom of footings. Concrete is specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

D. Initial Backfill: Place and compact initial backfill of subbase material or satisfactory soil, free of particles larger than 1 inch (25 mm) in any dimension, to a height of 12 inches (300 mm) over the pipe or conduit.

1. Carefully compact initial backfill under pipe haunches and compact evenly up on both sides and along the full length of piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of piping or conduit. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing.

E. Final Backfill: Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil to final subgrade elevation.

F. Backfill under Asphalt and Concrete Paving: Place and compact initial backfill of subbase material, free of particles larger than 1 inch (25 mm) in any dimension, to completely fill trench to final subgrade elevation.

1. Carefully compact initial backfill under pipe haunches and compact evenly up on both sides and along the full length of piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of piping or conduit. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing.

G. Warning Tape: Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches (300 mm) below finished grade, except 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade under pavements and slabs.

3.10 SOIL FILL

A. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill material will bond with existing material.

B. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows:

Page 133: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 312000 - 7 EARTH MOVING

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

1. Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material. 2. Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material. 3. Under steps and ramps, use engineered fill. 4. Under building slabs, use engineered fill. 5. Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill.

3.11 SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL

A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content.

1. Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice.

2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material that exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight.

3.12 COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS

A. Geotechnical Report is the controlling parameters for placing and compaction of backfills and fills. If a report does not exist then the specifications control the parameters.

B. Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 8 inches (200 mm) in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment and not more than 4 inches (100 mm)in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers.

C. Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations and uniformly along the full length of each structure.

D. Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698:

1. Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12 inches (300 mm) of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent.

2. Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 92 percent.

3. Under turf or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 85 percent.

4. For utility trenches, compact each layer of initial and final backfill soil material at 85 percent.

3.13 GRADING

A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated.

Page 134: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 312000 - 8 EARTH MOVING

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

B. Site Rough Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish subgrades to elevations required to achieve indicated finish elevations, within the following subgrade tolerances:

1. Turf or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). 2. Walks: Plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). 3. Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm).

C. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch (13 mm) when tested with a 10-foot (3-m) straightedge.

3.14 SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES UNDER PAVEMENTS AND WALKS

A. Geotechnical Report is the controlling parameters for placing and compaction of subbase and base courses. If a report does not exist then the specifications control the parameters.

B. Place subbase course and base course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

C. On prepared subgrade, place subbase course and base course under pavements and walks as follows:

1. Shape subbase course and base course to required crown elevations and cross-slope grades.

2. Place subbase course and base course that exceeds 6 inches (150 mm) in compacted thickness in layers of equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches (150 mm) thick or less than 3 inches (75 mm) thick.

3. Compact subbase course and base course at optimum moisture content to required grades, lines, cross sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698.

3.15 DRAINAGE COURSE UNDER CONCRETE SLABS-ON-GRADE

A. Place drainage course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

B. On prepared subgrade, place and compact drainage course under cast-in-place concrete slabs-on-grade as follows:

1. Place drainage course that exceeds 6 inches (150 mm) in compacted thickness in layers of equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches (150 mm) thick or less than 3 inches (75 mm) thick.

2. Compact each layer of drainage course to required cross sections and thicknesses to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698.

3.16 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform inspections:

Page 135: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 312000 - 9 EARTH MOVING

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified geotechnical engineering testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

C. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with subsequent earth moving only after test results for previously completed work comply with requirements.

D. Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when approved by Architect.

E. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil materials to depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained.

3.17 PROTECTION

A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris.

B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions.

C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.

1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.

3.18 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS

A. Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste materials, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

END OF SECTION 312000

Page 136: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 313116 - 1 TERMITE CONTROL

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

SECTION 313116

TERMITE CONTROL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Soil treatment. 2. Bait-station system.

1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include the EPA-Registered Label for termiticide products.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Product certificates.

B. Soil Treatment Application Report: Include the following:

1. Date and time of application. 2. Moisture content of soil before application. 3. Termiticide brand name and manufacturer. 4. Quantity of undiluted termiticide used. 5. Dilutions, methods, volumes used, and rates of application. 6. Areas of application. 7. Water source for application.

C. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: A specialist who is licensed according to regulations of authorities having jurisdiction to apply termite control treatment and products in jurisdiction where Project is located and who employs workers trained and approved by manufacturer to install manufacturer's products.

Page 137: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 313116 - 2 TERMITE CONTROL

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Soil Treatment Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by Applicator and Contractor, certifying that termite control work consisting of applied soil termiticide treatment will prevent infestation of subterranean termites, including Formosan termites (Coptotermes formosanus). If subterranean termite activity or damage is discovered during warranty period, re-treat soil and repair or replace damage caused by termite infestation.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOIL TREATMENT

A. Termiticide: EPA-Registered termiticide acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, in an aqueous solution formulated to prevent termite infestation.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

a. BASF Corporation. b. Bayer Environmental Science.

2. Service Life of Treatment: Soil treatment termiticide that is effective for not less than five years against infestation of subterranean termites.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Remove extraneous sources of wood cellulose and other edible materials, such as wood debris, tree stumps and roots, stakes, formwork, and construction waste wood from soil within and around foundations.

B. Soil Treatment Preparation: Remove foreign matter and impermeable soil materials that could decrease treatment effectiveness on areas to be treated.

3.2 APPLYING SOIL TREATMENT

A. Application: Mix soil treatment termiticide solution to a uniform consistency. Distribute treatment uniformly. Apply treatment at the product's EPA-Registered Label volume and rate for maximum specified concentration of termiticide to the following so that a continuous horizontal and vertical termiticidal barrier or treated zone is established around and under building construction.

Page 138: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 313116 - 3 TERMITE CONTROL

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

1. Slabs-on-Grade and Basement Slabs: Under ground-supported slab construction, including footings, building slabs, and attached slabs as an overall treatment. Treat soil materials before concrete footings and slabs are placed.

2. Foundations: Soil adjacent to and along the entire inside perimeter of foundation walls; along both sides of interior partition walls; around plumbing pipes and electric conduit penetrating the slab; around interior column footers, piers, and chimney bases; and along the entire outside perimeter, from grade to bottom of footing.

3. Crawlspaces: Soil under and adjacent to foundations. Treat adjacent areas, including around entrance platform, porches, and equipment bases. Apply overall treatment only where attached concrete platform and porches are on fill or ground.

4. Masonry: Treat voids. 5. Penetrations: At expansion joints, control joints, and areas where slabs and below-grade

walls will be penetrated.

B. Post warning signs in areas of application.

C. Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, grading, landscaping, or other construction activities following application.

END OF SECTION 313116

Page 139: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 321216 - 1 ASPHALT PAVING

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

SECTION 321216

ASPHALT PAVING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Cold milling of existing asphalt pavement. 2. Hot-mix asphalt patching. 3. Hot-mix asphalt paving. 4. Hot-mix asphalt overlay. 5. Asphalt curbs.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for subgrade preparation, fill material, unbound-aggregate subbase and base courses, and aggregate pavement shoulders.

2. Section 321373 "Concrete Paving Joint Sealants" for joint sealants and fillers at pavement terminations.

1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Material Certificates: For each paving material. Include statement that mixes containing recycled materials will perform equal to mixes produced from all new materials.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A paving-mix manufacturer registered with and approved by authorities having jurisdiction or the DOT of state in which Project is located.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with materials, workmanship, and other applicable requirements of authorities having jurisdiction or the DOT of state in which Project is located for asphalt paving work.

Page 140: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 321216 - 2 ASPHALT PAVING

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

1. Measurement and payment provisions and safety program submittals included in standard specifications do not apply to this Section.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ASPHALT PAVING GENERAL

A. Geotechnical Report is the controlling design parameters for Asphalt Paving. If a report does not exist then the drawings control the design.

2.2 AGGREGATES

A. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM D 692/D 692M, sound; angular crushed stone, crushed gravel, or cured, crushed blast-furnace slag.

B. Fine Aggregate: ASTM D 1073, sharp-edged natural sand or sand prepared from stone, gravel, cured blast-furnace slag, or combinations thereof.

C. Mineral Filler: ASTM D 242/D 242M, rock or slag dust, hydraulic cement, or other inert material.

2.3 ASPHALT MATERIALS

A. Asphalt Binder: AASHTO M 320, PG 64-22, PG 58-28 or PG 70-22 as required by project conditions.

B. Tack Coat: ASTM D 977 emulsified asphalt, or ASTM D 2397 cationic emulsified asphalt, slow setting, diluted in water, of suitable grade and consistency for application.

2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. Recycled Materials for Hot-Mix Asphalt Mixes: Reclaimed asphalt pavement; reclaimed, unbound-aggregate base material; and recycled tires, asphalt shingles, or glass from sources and gradations that have performed satisfactorily in previous installations, equal to performance of required hot-mix asphalt paving produced from all new materials.

B. Herbicide: Commercial chemical for weed control, registered by the EPA, and not classified as "restricted use" for locations and conditions of application. Provide in granular, liquid, or wettable powder form.

2.5 MIXES

A. Recycled Content of Hot-Mix Asphalt: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not more than 25 percent by weight.

Page 141: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 321216 - 3 ASPHALT PAVING

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

1. Surface Course Limit: Recycled content no more than 10 percent by weight.

B. Hot-Mix Asphalt: Dense-graded, hot-laid, hot-mix asphalt plant mixes approved by authorities having jurisdiction and complying with the following requirements:

1. Provide mixes with a history of satisfactory performance in geographical area where Project is located.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 COLD MILLING

A. Clean existing pavement surface of loose and deleterious material immediately before cold milling. Remove existing asphalt pavement by cold milling to grades and cross sections indicated.

1. Mill to a depth of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). 2. Patch surface depressions deeper than 1 inch (25 mm) after milling, before wearing

course is laid.

3.2 PATCHING

A. Asphalt Pavement: Saw cut perimeter of patch and excavate existing pavement section to sound base. Excavate rectangular or trapezoidal patches, extending 12 inches (300 mm) into perimeter of adjacent sound pavement, unless otherwise indicated. Cut excavation faces vertically. Remove excavated material. Recompact existing unbound-aggregate base course to form new subgrade.

B. Portland Cement Concrete Pavement: Break cracked slabs and roll as required to reseat concrete pieces firmly.

1. Remove disintegrated or badly cracked pavement. Excavate rectangular or trapezoidal patches, extending into perimeter of adjacent sound pavement, unless otherwise indicated. Cut excavation faces vertically. Recompact existing unbound-aggregate base course to form new subgrade.

C. Tack Coat: Before placing patch material, apply tack coat uniformly to vertical asphalt surfaces abutting the patch. Apply at a rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal./sq. yd. (0.2 to 0.7 L/sq. m).

1. Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before applying hot-mix asphalt paving. 2. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings. Remove

spillages and clean affected surfaces.

D. Placing Patch Material: Fill excavated pavement areas with hot-mix asphalt base mix for full thickness of patch and, while still hot, compact flush with adjacent surface.

Page 142: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 321216 - 4 ASPHALT PAVING

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

3.3 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. General: Immediately before placing asphalt materials, remove loose and deleterious material from substrate surfaces. Ensure that prepared subgrade is ready to receive paving.

B. Proof-roll subgrade below pavements with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or saturated subgrades.

C. Herbicide Treatment: Apply herbicide according to manufacturer's recommended rates and written application instructions. Apply to dry, prepared subgrade or surface of compacted-aggregate base before applying paving materials.

D. Tack Coat: Apply uniformly to surfaces of existing pavement at a rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal./sq. yd. (0.2 to 0.7 L/sq. m).

1. Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before applying hot-mix asphalt paving. 2. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings. Remove

spillages and clean affected surfaces.

3.4 PLACING HOT-MIX ASPHALT

A. Machine place hot-mix asphalt on prepared surface, spread uniformly, and strike off. Place asphalt mix by hand in areas inaccessible to equipment in a manner that prevents segregation of mix. Place each course to required grade, cross section, and thickness when compacted.

1. Spread mix at a minimum temperature of 250 deg F (121 deg C). 2. Regulate paver machine speed to obtain smooth, continuous surface free of pulls and

tears in asphalt-paving mat.

B. Place paving in consecutive strips not less than 10 feet (3 m) wide unless infill edge strips of a lesser width are required.

C. Promptly correct surface irregularities in paving course behind paver. Use suitable hand tools to remove excess material forming high spots. Fill depressions with hot-mix asphalt to prevent segregation of mix; use suitable hand tools to smooth surface.

3.5 JOINTS

A. Construct joints to ensure a continuous bond between adjoining paving sections. Construct joints free of depressions, with same texture and smoothness as other sections of hot-mix asphalt course.

1. Clean contact surfaces and apply tack coat to joints. 2. Offset longitudinal joints, in successive courses, a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm). 3. Offset transverse joints, in successive courses, a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm). 4. Construct transverse joints at each point where paver ends a day's work and resumes

work at a subsequent time. Construct these joints using either "bulkhead" or "papered"

Page 143: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 321216 - 5 ASPHALT PAVING

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

method according to AI MS-22, for both "Ending a Lane" and "Resumption of Paving Operations."

3.6 COMPACTION

A. General: Begin compaction as soon as placed hot-mix paving will bear roller weight without excessive displacement. Compact hot-mix paving with hot, hand tampers or with vibratory-plate compactors in areas inaccessible to rollers.

1. Complete compaction before mix temperature cools to 185 deg F (85 deg C).

B. Breakdown Rolling: Complete breakdown or initial rolling immediately after rolling joints and outside edge. Examine surface immediately after breakdown rolling for indicated crown, grade, and smoothness. Correct laydown and rolling operations to comply with requirements.

C. Intermediate Rolling: Begin intermediate rolling immediately after breakdown rolling while hot-mix asphalt is still hot enough to achieve specified density. Continue rolling until hot-mix asphalt course has been uniformly compacted to the following density:

1. Average Density: 92 percent of reference maximum theoretical density according to ASTM D 2041, but not less than 90 percent or greater than 96 percent.

D. Finish Rolling: Finish roll paved surfaces to remove roller marks while hot-mix asphalt is still warm.

E. Edge Shaping: While surface is being compacted and finished, trim edges of pavement to proper alignment. Bevel edges while asphalt is still hot; compact thoroughly.

F. Protection: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until it has cooled and hardened.

G. Erect barricades to protect paving from traffic until mixture has cooled enough not to become marked.

3.7 ASPHALT CURBS

A. Construct hot-mix asphalt curbs over compacted pavement surfaces. Apply a light tack coat unless pavement surface is still tacky and free from dust. Spread mix at a minimum temperature of 250 deg F (121 deg C).

1. Asphalt Mix: Same as pavement surface-course mix.

B. Place hot-mix asphalt to curb cross section indicated or, if not indicated, to local standard shapes, by machine or by hand in wood or metal forms. Tamp hand-placed materials and screed to smooth finish. Remove forms after hot-mix asphalt has cooled.

Page 144: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 321216 - 6 ASPHALT PAVING

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

3.8 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES

A. Pavement Thickness: Compact each course to produce the thickness indicated within the following tolerances:

1. Binder Course: Plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm). 2. Wearing Surface Course: Plus 1/4 inch (6 mm), no minus.

B. Pavement Surface Smoothness: Compact each course to produce a surface smoothness within the following tolerances as determined by using a 10-foot (3-m) straightedge applied transversely or longitudinally to paved areas:

1. Binder Course: 1/4 inch (6 mm). 2. Wearing Surface Course: 1/8 inch (3 mm). 3. Crowned Surfaces: Test with crowned template centered and at right angle to crown.

Maximum allowable variance from template is 1/4 inch (6 mm).

3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Replace and compact hot-mix asphalt where core tests were taken.

C. Remove and replace or install additional hot-mix asphalt where test results or measurements indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.

3.10 WASTE HANDLING

A. General: Handle asphalt-paving waste according to approved waste management plan required in Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."

END OF SECTION 321216

Page 145: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 321313 - 1 CONCRETE PAVING

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

SECTION 321313

CONCRETE PAVING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Driveways. 2. Roadways. 3. Parking lots. 4. Curbs and gutters. 5. Walks.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Samples: For each type of product, ingredient, or admixture requiring color selection.

C. Design Mixtures: For each concrete paving mixture. Include alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Ready-Mix-Concrete Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.

1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities" (Quality Control Manual - Section 3, "Plant Certification Checklist").

1.4 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform preconstruction testing on concrete paving mixtures.

Page 146: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 321313 - 2 CONCRETE PAVING

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONCRETE, GENERAL

A. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301 (ACI 301M) unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Plain-Steel Welded-Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 1064/A 1064M, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets.

B. Deformed-Steel Welded-Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 1064/A 1064M, flat sheet.

C. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420); deformed.

D. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420) plain-steel bars with epoxy coating. Cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs.

E. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars, welded-wire reinforcement, and dowels in place. Manufacture bar supports according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete specified.

2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cementitious Materials: Use the following cementitious materials, of same type, brand, and source throughout Project:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, gray portland cement Type I. 2. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or Class F. 3. Slag Cement: ASTM C 989/C 989M, Grade 100 or 120.

B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33/C 33M, Class 4S, uniformly graded. Provide aggregates from a single source.

C. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260/C 260M.

D. Chemical Admixtures: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious material.

E. Color Pigment: ASTM C 979/C 979M, synthetic mineral-oxide pigments or colored water-reducing admixtures; color stable, free of carbon black, nonfading, and resistant to lime and other alkalis. Provide only when indicated on drawings.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

Page 147: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 321313 - 3 CONCRETE PAVING

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

a. Dynamic Color Solutions, Inc. b. Rockwood Pigments NA, Inc. c. Stampcrete International, Ltd. d. SureCrete Design Products.

2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

F. Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C 94/C 94M.

2.4 FIBER REINFORCEMENT

A. Synthetic Fiber: Monofilament polypropylene fibers engineered and designed for use in decorative concrete paving, complying with ASTM C 1116/C 1116M, Type III, 1/2 to 1-1/2 inches (13 to 38 mm) long.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

a. Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company. b. Grace Construction Products; W.R. Grace & Co. -- Conn. c. Sika Corporation.

B. Synthetic Fiber: Fibrillated polypropylene fibers engineered and designed for use in decorative concrete paving, complying with ASTM C 1116/C 1116M, Type III, 1/2 to 1-1/2 inches (13 to 38 mm) long.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

a. Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company. b. Grace Construction Products; W.R. Grace & Co. -- Conn. c. Sika Corporation.

2.5 CURING MATERIALS

A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 3, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. (305 g/sq. m) dry.

B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

C. Water: Potable.

D. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular, film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete.

Page 148: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 321313 - 4 CONCRETE PAVING

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

a. Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company. b. Sika Corporation. c. W.R. Meadows, Inc.

E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, dissipating.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

a. ChemMasters, Inc. b. Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company. c. W.R. Meadows, Inc.

F. White, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 2, Class B, dissipating.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

a. ChemMasters, Inc. b. Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company. c. W.R. Meadows, Inc.

2.6 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Joint Fillers: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber in preformed strips.

B. Slip-Resistive Aggregate Finish: Factory-graded, packaged, rustproof, nonglazing, abrasive aggregate of fused aluminum-oxide granules or crushed emery aggregate containing not less than 50 percent aluminum oxide and not less than 20 percent ferric oxide; unaffected by freezing, moisture, and cleaning materials.

2.7 CONCRETE MIXTURES

A. Prepare design mixtures, proportioned according to ACI 301 (ACI 301M), for each type and strength of normal-weight concrete, and as determined by either laboratory trial mixtures or field experience.

B. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement in concrete as follows:

1. Fly Ash or Pozzolan: 25 percent.

Page 149: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 321313 - 5 CONCRETE PAVING

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

2. Slag Cement: 50 percent. 3. Combined Fly Ash or Pozzolan, and Slag Cement: 50 percent, with fly ash or pozzolan

not exceeding 25 percent.

C. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in normal-weight concrete at point of placement having an air content as follows:

1. Air Content: 5.5 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1-1/2-inch(38-mm) nominal maximum aggregate size.

2. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1-inch (25-mm)or 3/4-inch (19-mm) nominal maximum aggregate size.

D. Chemical Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Synthetic Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mixture at manufacturer's recommended rate, but not less than 1.5 lb/cu. yd. (0.90 kg/cu. m).

F. Color Pigment: Add color pigment to concrete mixture according to manufacturer's written instructions and to result in hardened concrete color consistent with approved mockup.

G. Concrete Mixtures: Normal-weight concrete.

1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 4000 psi (27.6 MPa). 2. Maximum W/C Ratio at Point of Placement: 0.45. 3. Slump Limit: 4 inches (100 mm), plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). 4. Solar Reflectance Index: Not less than 29.

2.8 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M. Furnish batch certificates for each batch discharged and used in the Work.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Proof-roll prepared subbase surface below concrete paving to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete.

Page 150: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 321313 - 6 CONCRETE PAVING

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

3.3 EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION

A. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides to required lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement.

B. Clean forms after each use and coat with form-release agent to ensure separation from concrete without damage.

3.4 STEEL REINFORCEMENT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement.

3.5 JOINTS

A. General: Form construction, isolation, and contraction joints and tool edges true to line, with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to centerline unless otherwise indicated.

B. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of paving and at locations where paving operations are stopped for more than one-half hour unless paving terminates at isolation joints.

C. Isolation Joints: Form isolation joints of preformed joint-filler strips abutting concrete curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, other fixed objects, and where indicated.

D. Contraction Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of the concrete thickness, to match jointing of existing adjacent concrete paving, when abuting existing concrete:

E. Edging: After initial floating, tool edges of paving, gutters, curbs, and joints in concrete with an edging tool to a 3/8-inch (10-mm) radius. Repeat tooling of edges after applying surface finishes.

3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed. Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at required finish elevation and alignment.

B. Comply with ACI 301 (ACI 301M) requirements for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete.

C. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do not push or drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place.

Page 151: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 321313 - 7 CONCRETE PAVING

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

D. Screed paving surface with a straightedge and strike off.

E. Commence initial floating using bull floats or darbies to impart an open-textured and uniform surface plane before excess moisture or bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb concrete surfaces before beginning finishing operations or spreading surface treatments.

3.7 FLOAT FINISHING

A. General: Do not add water to concrete surfaces during finishing operations.

B. Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation when bleedwater sheen has disappeared and concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to true planes. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately to uniform granular texture.

1. Burlap Finish: Drag a seamless strip of damp burlap across float-finished concrete, perpendicular to line of traffic, to provide a uniform, gritty texture.

2. Medium-to-Fine-Textured Broom Finish: Draw a soft-bristle broom across float-finished concrete surface, perpendicular to line of traffic, to provide a uniform, fine-line texture.

3. Medium-to-Coarse-Textured Broom Finish: Provide a coarse finish by striating float-finished concrete surface 1/16 to 1/8 inch (1.6 to 3 mm) deep with a stiff-bristled broom, perpendicular to line of traffic.

C. Slip-Resistive Aggregate Finish: Before final floating, spread slip-resistive aggregate finish on paving surface according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Cure concrete with curing compound recommended by slip-resistive aggregate manufacturer. Apply curing compound immediately after final finishing.

2. After curing, lightly work surface with a steel-wire brush or abrasive stone and water to expose nonslip aggregate.

3.8 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures.

B. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection.

C. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h) before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete but before float finishing.

D. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface.

A. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods:

Page 152: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 321313 - 8 CONCRETE PAVING

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days. 2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover

for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period, using cover material and waterproof tape.

3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

3.9 PAVING TOLERANCES

A. Comply with tolerances in ACI 117 (ACI 117M) and as follows:

1. Elevation: 3/4 inch (19 mm). 2. Thickness: Plus 3/8 inch (10 mm), minus 1/4 inch (6 mm). 3. Surface: Gap below 10-feet- (3-m-) long; unleveled straightedge not to exceed 1/2 inch

(13 mm). 4. Joint Spacing: 3 inches (75 mm). 5. Contraction Joint Depth: Plus 1/4 inch (6 mm), no minus. 6. Joint Width: Plus 1/8 inch (3 mm), no minus.

3.10 REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A. Remove and replace concrete paving that is broken, damaged, or defective or that does not comply with requirements in this Section. Remove work in complete sections from joint to joint unless otherwise approved by Architect.

B. Protect concrete paving from damage. Exclude traffic from paving for at least 14 days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain paving as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur.

C. Maintain concrete paving free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material. Sweep paving not more than two days before date scheduled for Substantial Completion inspections.

END OF SECTION 321313

Page 153: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 321373 - 1 PAVING JOINT SEALANTS

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

SECTION 321373

PAVING JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Cold-applied joint sealants. 2. Joint-sealant backer materials. 3. Primers.

1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Samples: For each kind and color of joint sealant required.

C. Paving-Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:

1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation. 2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name. 3. Joint-sealant formulation. 4. Joint-sealant color.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Product certificates.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backing materials, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

Page 154: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 321373 - 2 PAVING JOINT SEALANTS

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

2.2 COLD-APPLIED JOINT SEALANTS

A. Single-Component, Nonsag, Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM D 5893/D 5893M, Type NS.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

a. Dow Corning Corporation. b. Pecora Corporation. c. Tremco Incorporated, an RPM International Inc. affiliate company.

2.3 JOINT-SEALANT BACKER MATERIALS

A. Provide one of the following:

1. Round Backer Rods for Cold-Applied Joint Sealants: ASTM D 5249, Type 3, of diameter and density required to control joint-sealant depth and prevent bottom-side adhesion of sealant.

2. Backer Strips for Cold- and Hot-Applied Joint Sealants: ASTM D 5249; Type 2; of thickness and width required to control joint-sealant depth, prevent bottom-side adhesion of sealant, and fill remainder of joint opening under sealant.

2.4 PRIMERS

A. Primers: Product recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A. Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer.

D. Joint-Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions.

E. Install joint-sealant backings to support joint sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

Page 155: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 321373 - 3 PAVING JOINT SEALANTS

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of joint-sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear joint-sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent joint-sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application

and replace them with dry materials.

F. Install joint sealants immediately following backing installation, using proven techniques that comply with the following:

1. Place joint sealants so they fully contact joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow

optimum sealant movement capability.

G. Tooling of Nonsag Joint Sealants: Immediately after joint-sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to the following requirements to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint:

1. Remove excess joint sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer and that do

not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.

H. Provide joint configuration to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise indicated.

I. Clean off excess joint sealant as the Work progresses, by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturers.

END OF SECTION 321373

Page 156: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 321723 - 1 PAVEMENT MARKINGS

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

SECTION 321723

PAVEMENT MARKINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes painted markings applied to asphalt and concrete pavement.

1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

1. Benjamin Moore & Co. 2. PPG Industries. 3. Pratt & Lambert. 4. Sherwin-Williams Company (The).

2.2 PAVEMENT-MARKING PAINT

A. Pavement-Marking Paint: MPI #32, alkyd traffic-marking paint.

1. Color: White.

B. Glass Beads: AASHTO M 247, Type 1.

C. VOC Content: Pavement markings used on building interior shall have a VOC content of 150 g/L or less.

Page 157: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 321723 - 2 PAVEMENT MARKINGS

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PAVEMENT MARKING

A. Do not apply pavement-marking paint until layout, colors, and placement have been verified with Architect.

B. Allow paving to age for a minimum of 30 days before starting pavement marking.

C. Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dust.

D. Apply paint with mechanical equipment to produce pavement markings, of dimensions indicated, with uniform, straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rates to provide a minimum wet film thickness of 15 mils (0.4 mm).

1. Apply graphic symbols and lettering with paint-resistant, die-cut stencils. Apply paint so that it cannot run beneath the stencil.

2. Broadcast glass beads uniformly into wet markings at a rate of 6 lb/gal. (0.72 kg/L).

END OF SECTION 321723

Page 158: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 321726 - 1 TACTILE WARNING SURFACING

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

SECTION 321726

TACTILE WARNING SURFACING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Cast-in-place detectable warning tiles.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Samples for each type of exposed finish requiring color selection.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TACTILE WARNING SURFACING, GENERAL

A. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in ICC A117.1 for tactile warning surfaces.

1. For tactile warning surfaces composed of multiple units, provide units that when installed provide consistent side-to-side and end-to-end dome spacing that complies with requirements.

2.2 DETECTABLE WARNING TILES

A. Cast-in-Place Detectable Warning Tiles: Accessible truncated-dome detectable warning tiles configured for setting flush in new concrete walkway surfaces, with slip-resistant surface treatment on domes and field of tile.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

a. Access Products, Inc. b. ADA Solutions, Inc. c. Detectable Warning Systems, Inc. d. Detectile Corp.

Page 159: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 321726 - 2 TACTILE WARNING SURFACING

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

2. Material: Cast-fiber-reinforced polymer concrete tile. 3. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line. 4. Shapes and Sizes: Rectangular panel, 12 by 12 inches (305 by 305 mm).

5. Dome Spacing and Configuration: Manufacturer's standard compliant spacing, in manufacturer's standard pattern.

6. Mounting:

a. Detectable warning tile set into formed recess in concrete and adhered with mortar or adhesive.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners and Anchors: Manufacturer's standard as required for secure anchorage of tactile warning surfaces, noncorrosive and compatible with each material joined, and complying with the following:

1. Furnish Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use. 2. Fastener Heads: For nonstructural connections, use flathead or oval countersunk screws

and bolts with tamper-resistant heads, colored to match tile.

B. Adhesive: As recommended by manufacturer for adhering tactile warning surfacing unit to pavement.

C. Sealant: As recommended by manufacturer for sealing perimeter of tactile warning surfacing unit.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF TACTILE WARNING SURFACING

A. General: Prepare substrate and install tactile warning surfacing according to manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise indicated.

B. Place tactile warning surfacing units in dimensions and orientation indicated. Comply with location requirements of AASHTO MP 12.

C. Surface-Applied Detectable Warning Tiles: Prepare existing paving surface by grinding and cleaning as recommended by manufacturer. Apply adhesive to back of tiles in amounts and pattern recommended by manufacturer, and set tiles in place. Install anchor devices through face of tiles and into pavement using anchors located as recommended by manufacturer. Apply sealant in continuous bead around perimeter of installation.

D. Remove and replace tactile warning surfacing that is broken or damaged or does not comply with requirements in this Section. Remove in complete sections from joint to joint unless otherwise approved by Architect. Replace using tactile warning surfacing installation methods acceptable to Architect.

Page 160: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 321726 - 3 TACTILE WARNING SURFACING

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

E. Protect tactile warning surfacing from damage and maintain free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material.

END OF SECTION 321726

Page 161: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 329113 - 1 SOIL PREPARATION

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

SECTION 329113

SOIL PREPARATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes planting soils specified by composition of the mixes.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 311000 "Site Clearing" for topsoil stripping and stockpiling. 2. Section 329700 "Vegetated Roof Assemblies" for growing media (soil).

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Duff Layer: A surface layer of soil, typical of forested areas, that is composed of mostly decayed leaves, twigs, and detritus.

B. Imported Soil: Soil that is transported to Project site for use.

C. Manufactured Soil: Soil produced by blending soils, sand, stabilized organic soil amendments, and other materials to produce planting soil.

D. Planting Soil: Existing, on-site soil; imported soil; or manufactured soil that has been modified as specified with soil amendments and perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for plant growth.

E. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or the top surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed.

F. Subsoil: Soil beneath the level of subgrade; soil beneath the topsoil layers of a naturally occurring soil profile, typified by less than 1 percent organic matter and few soil organisms.

G. Surface Soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile. In undisturbed areas, surface soil is typically called "topsoil"; but in disturbed areas such as urban environments, the surface soil can be subsoil.

H. USCC: U.S. Composting Council.

1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at [Project site] <Insert location>.

Page 162: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 329113 - 2 SOIL PREPARATION

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. LEED Submittals:

1. Product Certificates for Credit MR 5: For products and materials required to comply with requirements for regional materials, certificates indicating location of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material. Include statement indicating distance to Project, cost for each regional material, and fraction by weight that is considered regional.

C. Samples: For each bulk-supplied material in sealed containers labeled with content, source, and date obtained; providing an accurate representation of composition, color, and texture.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Field quality-control reports.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent, state-operated, or university-operated laboratory; experienced in soil science, soil testing, and plant nutrition; with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated; and that specializes in types of tests to be performed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Regional Materials: [Imported soil] [manufactured planting soil] [and] [soil amendments and fertilizers] shall be manufactured within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site from materials that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within 500 miles(800 km) of Project site.

2.2 PLANTING SOILS SPECIFIED BY COMPOSITION

A. Planting-Soil Type <Insert drawing designation>: Existing, on-site surface soil, with the duff layer, if any, retained[; and stockpiled on-site]; modified to produce viable planting soil. Blend existing, on-site surface soil with the following soil amendments and fertilizers in the following quantities to produce planting soil:

1. Ratio of Loose Compost to Soil: [1:4] [1:3] [1:2] <Insert ratio> by volume. 2. Ratio of Loose [Sphagnum] [Muck] Peat to Soil: <Insert ratio> by volume. 3. Ratio of Loose Wood Derivatives Soil: <Insert ratio> by volume. 4. Weight of Lime: <Insert weight> per [1000 sq. ft. (100 sq. m)] <Insert area> per [6

inches (150 mm)] <Insert dimension> of soil depth.

Page 163: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 329113 - 3 SOIL PREPARATION

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

5. Weight of [Sulfur] [Iron Sulfate]: <Insert weight> per [1000 sq. ft. (100 sq. m)] <Insert area> per [6 inches (150 mm)] <Insert dimension> of soil depth.

6. Weight of Agricultural Gypsum: <Insert weight> per [1000 sq. ft. (100 sq. m)] <Insert area> per [6 inches (150 mm)] <Insert dimension> of soil depth.

7. Weight of Superphosphate: <Insert weight> per [1000 sq. ft. (100 sq. m)] <Insert area> per [6 inches (150 mm)] <Insert dimension> of soil depth.

8. Weight of Commercial Fertilizer: <Insert weight> per [1000 sq. ft. (100 sq. m)] <Insert area> per [6 inches (150 mm)] <Insert dimension> of soil depth.

9. Weight of Slow-Release Fertilizer: <Insert weight> per [1000 sq. ft. (100 sq. m)] <Insert area> per [6 inches (150 mm)] <Insert dimension> of soil depth.

B. Planting-Soil Type <Insert drawing designation>: Imported, naturally formed soil from off-site sources and consisting of [sandy loam] [loam] [silt loam] [loamy sand] [or] [sand] soil <Insert soil texture> according to USDA textures; and modified to produce viable planting soil.

1. Sources: Take imported, unamended soil from sources that are naturally well-drained sites where topsoil occurs at least 4 inches (100 mm) deep, not from [agricultural land, ]bogs, or marshes; and that do not contain undesirable organisms; disease-causing plant pathogens; or obnoxious weeds and invasive plants including, but not limited to, quackgrass, Johnsongrass, poison ivy, nutsedge, nimblewill, Canada thistle, bindweed, bentgrass, wild garlic, ground ivy, perennial sorrel, and bromegrass.

2. Additional Properties of Imported Soil before Amending: Soil reaction of [pH 6 to 7] <Insert range> and minimum of [2] [4] [6] <Insert number> percent organic-matter content, friable, and with sufficient structure to give good tilth and aeration.

3. Unacceptable Properties: Clean soil of the following:

a. Unacceptable Materials: Concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, building debris, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, acid, and other extraneous materials that are harmful to plant growth.

b. Unsuitable Materials: Stones, roots, plants, sod, clay lumps, and pockets of coarse sand that exceed a combined maximum of [8] <Insert number> percent by dry weight of the imported soil.

c. Large Materials: Stones, clods, roots, clay lumps, and pockets of coarse sand exceeding [2 inches (50 mm)] [3 inches (75 mm)] <Insert dimension> in any dimension.

4. Amended Soil Composition: Blend imported, unamended soil with the following soil amendments and fertilizers in the following quantities to produce planting soil:

a. Ratio of Loose Compost to Soil: [1:4] [1:3] [1:2] <Insert ratio> by volume. b. Ratio of Loose [Sphagnum] [Muck] Peat to Soil: <Insert ratio> by volume. c. Ratio of Loose Wood Derivatives to Soil: <Insert ratio> by volume. d. Weight of Lime: <Insert weight> per [1000 sq. ft. (100 sq. m)] <Insert area> per

[6 inches (150 mm)] <Insert dimension> of soil depth. e. Weight of [Sulfur] [Iron Sulfate]: <Insert weight> per [1000 sq. ft. (100 sq. m)]

<Insert area> per [6 inches (150 mm)] <Insert dimension> of soil depth. f. Weight of Agricultural Gypsum: <Insert weight> per [1000 sq. ft. (100 sq. m)]

<Insert area> per [6 inches (150 mm)] <Insert dimension> of soil depth.

Page 164: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 329113 - 4 SOIL PREPARATION

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

g. Weight of Superphosphate: <Insert weight> per [1000 sq. ft. (100 sq. m)] <Insert area> per [6 inches (150 mm)] <Insert dimension> of soil depth.

h. Weight of Commercial Fertilizer: <Insert weight> per [1000 sq. ft. (100 sq. m)] <Insert area> per [6 inches (150 mm)] <Insert dimension> of soil depth.

i. Weight of Slow-Release Fertilizer: <Insert weight> per [1000 sq. ft. (100 sq. m)] <Insert area> per [6 inches (150 mm)] <Insert dimension> of soil depth.

C. Planting-Soil Type <Insert drawing designation>: Manufactured soil consisting of manufacturer's basic [topsoil,] [sandy loam according to USDA textures,] <Insert soil texture or manufacturer's base-soil designation> blended in a manufacturing facility with sand, stabilized organic soil amendments, and other materials to produce viable planting soil.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by the following] [provide products by one of the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:

2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide [product indicated on Drawings] <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation> or comparable product by one of the following:

a. <Insert manufacturer's name>.

3. Additional Properties of Manufacturer's Basic Soil before Amending: Soil reaction of [pH 6 to 7] <Insert range> and minimum of [2] [4] [6] <Insert number> percent organic-matter content, friable, and with sufficient structure to give good tilth and aeration.

4. Unacceptable Properties: Manufactured soil shall not contain the following:

a. Unacceptable Materials: Concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, building debris, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, acid, and other extraneous materials that are harmful to plant growth.

b. Unsuitable Materials: Stones, roots, plants, sod, clay lumps, and pockets of coarse sand that exceed a combined maximum of [5] <Insert number> percent by dry weight of the manufactured soil.

c. Large Materials: Stones, clods, roots, clay lumps, and pockets of coarse sand exceeding [1-1/2 inches (38 mm)] [2 inches (50 mm)] <Insert dimension> in any dimension.

5. Blend manufacturer's basic soil with the following soil amendments and fertilizers in the following quantities to produce planting soil:

a. Ratio of Loose Compost to Soil: [1:4] [1:3] [1:2] <Insert ratio> by volume. b. Ratio of Loose [Sphagnum] [Muck] Peat to Soil: <Insert ratio> by volume. c. Ratio of Loose Wood Derivatives Soil: <Insert ratio> by volume. d. Volume of Sand: <Insert volume> per [cu. yd. (cu. m)] <Insert value>. e. Volume of Perlite: <Insert volume> per [cu. yd. (cu. m)] <Insert value>. f. Weight of Lime: <Insert weight> per [cu. yd. (cu. m)] <Insert value>. g. Weight of [Sulfur] [Iron Sulfate]: <Insert weight> per [cu. yd. (cu. m)] <Insert

value>.

Page 165: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 329113 - 5 SOIL PREPARATION

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

h. Weight of Agricultural Gypsum: <Insert weight> per [cu. yd. (cu. m)] <Insert value>.

i. Weight of Superphosphate: <Insert weight> per [cu. yd. (cu. m)] <Insert value>. j. Weight of Commercial Fertilizer: <Insert weight> per [cu. yd. (cu. m)] <Insert

value>. k. Weight of Slow-Release Fertilizer: <Insert weight> per [cu. yd. (cu. m)] <Insert

value>.

2.3 INORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS

A. Lime: ASTM C 602, agricultural liming material containing a minimum of 80 percent calcium carbonate equivalent and as follows:

1. Class: T, with a minimum of 99 percent passing through a No. 8 (2.36-mm) sieve and a minimum of 75 percent passing through a No. 60 (0.25-mm) sieve.

2. Class: O, with a minimum of 95 percent passing through a No. 8 (2.36-mm) sieve and a minimum of 55 percent passing through a No. 60 (0.25-mm) sieve.

3. Form: Provide lime in form of ground [dolomitic limestone] [calcitic limestone] [mollusk shells] <Insert material>.

B. Sulfur: Granular, biodegradable, and containing a minimum of 90 percent elemental sulfur, with a minimum of 99 percent passing through a No. 6 (3.35-mm) sieve and a maximum of 10 percent passing through a No. 40 (0.425-mm) sieve.

C. Iron Sulfate: Granulated ferrous sulfate containing a minimum of 20 percent iron and 10 percent sulfur.

D. Perlite: Horticultural perlite, soil amendment grade.

E. Agricultural Gypsum: Minimum 90 percent calcium sulfate, finely ground with 90 percent passing through a No. 50 (0.30-mm) sieve.

F. Sand: Clean, washed, natural or manufactured, free of toxic materials, and according to [ASTM C 33/C 33M] <Insert requirement>.

2.4 ORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS

A. Compost: Well-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter produced by composting feedstock, and bearing USCC's "Seal of Testing Assurance," and as follows:

1. Feedstock: [Limited to leaves] [May include sewage sludge] [May include animal waste] <Insert requirement>.

2. Reaction: [pH of 5.5 to 8] <Insert range>. 3. Soluble-Salt Concentration: Less than [4] <Insert value> dS/m. 4. Moisture Content: [35 to 55] <Insert number range> percent by weight. 5. Organic-Matter Content: [30 to 40] [50 to 60] <Insert number range> percent of dry

weight.

Page 166: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 329113 - 6 SOIL PREPARATION

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

6. Particle Size: Minimum of 98 percent passing through a [4-inch (100-mm)] [2-inch (50-mm)] [1-inch (25-mm)] [1/2-inch (13-mm)] sieve.

B. Sphagnum Peat: Partially decomposed sphagnum peat moss, finely divided or of granular texture with 100 percent passing through a [1/2-inch (13-mm)] <Insert dimension> sieve, a pH of 3.4 to 4.8, and a soluble-salt content measured by electrical conductivity of [maximum 5] <Insert value or range> dS/m.

C. Muck Peat: Partially decomposed moss peat, native peat, or reed-sedge peat, finely divided or of granular texture with 100 percent passing through a [1/2-inch (13-mm)] <Insert dimension> sieve, a pH of 6 to 7.5, a soluble-salt content measured by electrical conductivity of [maximum 5] <Insert value or range> dS/m, having a water-absorbing capacity of 1100 to 2000 percent, and containing no sand.

D. Wood Derivatives: Shredded and composted, nitrogen-treated sawdust, ground bark, or wood waste; of uniform texture and free of chips, stones, sticks, soil, or toxic materials.

E. Manure: Well-rotted, unleached, stable or cattle manure containing not more than 25 percent by volume of straw, sawdust, or other bedding materials; free of toxic substances, stones, sticks, soil, weed seed, debris, and material harmful to plant growth.

2.5 FERTILIZERS

A. Superphosphate: Commercial, phosphate mixture, soluble; a minimum of [20] [33] [50] percent available phosphoric acid.

B. Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of fast- and slow-release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea formaldehyde, phosphorous, and potassium in the following composition:

1. Composition: [1 lb/1000 sq. ft. (0.5 kg/100 sq. m)] <Insert value> of actual nitrogen, 4 percent phosphorous, and 2 percent potassium, by weight.

2. Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended in soil reports from a qualified testing agency.

C. Slow-Release Fertilizer: Granular or pelleted fertilizer consisting of 50 percent water-insoluble nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium in the following composition:

1. Composition: 20 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorous, and 10 percent potassium, by weight.

2. Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended in soil reports from a qualified testing agency.

Page 167: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 329113 - 7 SOIL PREPARATION

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Place planting soil and fertilizers according to requirements in other Specification Sections.

B. Verify that no foreign or deleterious material or liquid such as paint, paint washout, concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, or acid has been deposited in planting soil.

3.2 PREPARATION OF UNAMENDED, ON-SITE SOIL BEFORE AMENDING

A. Excavation: Excavate soil from designated area(s) to a depth of [6 inches (150 mm)] <Insert dimension> and stockpile until amended.

B. Unacceptable Materials: Clean soil of concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, building debris, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, acid, and other extraneous materials that are harmful to plant growth.

C. Unsuitable Materials: Clean soil to contain a maximum of [8] <Insert number> percent by dry weight of stones, roots, plants, sod, clay lumps, and pockets of coarse sand.

D. Screening: Pass unamended soil through a [2-inch (50-mm)] [3-inch (75-mm)] <Insert dimension> sieve to remove large materials.

3.3 PLACING AND MIXING PLANTING SOIL OVER EXPOSED SUBGRADE

A. General: Apply and mix unamended soil with amendments on-site to produce required planting soil. Do not apply materials or till if existing soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet.

B. Subgrade Preparation: Till subgrade to a minimum depth of [4 inches (100 mm)] [6 inches(150 mm)] [8 inches (200 mm)] [12 inches (300 mm)] [18 inches (450 mm)] <Insert dimension>. Remove stones larger than [1-1/2 inches (38 mm)] [2 inches (50 mm)] [3 inches(75 mm)] <Insert dimension> in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

C. Mixing: Spread unamended soil to total depth [of 4 inches (100 mm)] [of 6 inches (150 mm)] [of 8 inches (200 mm)] [of 12 inches (300 mm)] [indicated on Drawings] <Insert dimension>, but not less than required to meet finish grades after mixing with amendments and natural settlement. Do not spread if soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet.

1. Amendments: Apply soil amendments[, except compost,] and fertilizer, if required, evenly on surface, and thoroughly blend them with unamended soil to produce planting soil.

a. Mix [lime] [and] [sulfur] with dry soil before mixing fertilizer.

Page 168: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 329113 - 8 SOIL PREPARATION

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

b. Mix fertilizer with planting soil no more than seven days before planting.

2. Lifts: Apply and mix unamended soil and amendments in lifts not exceeding [8 inches(200 mm)] [12 inches (300 mm)] <Insert dimension> in loose depth for material compacted by compaction equipment, and not more than [4 inches (100 mm)] [6 inches(150 mm)] in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers.

D. Compaction: Compact each blended lift of planting soil to [75 to 82] <Insert number range> percent of maximum Standard Proctor density according to ASTM D 698 and tested in-place[ except where a different compaction value is indicated on Drawings].

E. Finish Grading: Grade planting soil to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades.

3.4 PLACING MANUFACTURED PLANTING SOIL OVER EXPOSED SUBGRADE

A. General: Apply manufactured soil on-site in its final, blended condition. Do not apply materials or till if existing soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet.

B. Subgrade Preparation: Till subgrade to a minimum depth of [4 inches (100 mm)] [6 inches(150 mm)] [8 inches (200 mm)] [12 inches (300 mm)] [18 inches (450 mm)] <Insert dimension>. Remove stones larger than [1-1/2 inches (38 mm)] [2 inches (50 mm)] [3 inches(75 mm)] <Insert dimension> in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

C. Application: Spread planting soil to total depth [of 4 inches (100 mm)] [of 6 inches (150 mm)] [of 8 inches (200 mm)] [of 12 inches (300 mm)] [indicated on Drawings] <Insert dimension>, but not less than required to meet finish grades after natural settlement. Do not spread if soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet.

1. Lifts: Apply planting soil in lifts not exceeding [8 inches (200 mm)] [12 inches (300 mm)] <Insert dimension> in loose depth for material compacted by compaction equipment, and not more than [4 inches (100 mm)] [6 inches (150 mm)] in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers.

D. Compaction: Compact each lift of planting soil to [75 to 82] <Insert number range> percent of maximum Standard Proctor density according to ASTM D 698[ except where a different compaction value is indicated on Drawings].

E. Finish Grading: Grade planting soil to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades.

3.5 BLENDING PLANTING SOIL IN PLACE

A. General: Mix amendments with in-place, unamended soil to produce required planting soil. Do not apply materials or till if existing soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet.

Page 169: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 329113 - 9 SOIL PREPARATION

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

B. Preparation: Till unamended, existing soil in planting areas to a minimum depth [of 4 inches(100 mm)] [of 6 inches (150 mm)] [of 8 inches (200 mm)] [of 12 inches (300 mm)] [of 18 inches (450 mm)] [indicated on Drawings] <Insert depth>. Remove stones larger than [1-1/2 inches (38 mm)] [2 inches (50 mm)] [3 inches (75 mm)] <Insert dimension> in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

C. Mixing: Apply soil amendments[, except compost,] and fertilizer, if required, evenly on surface, and thoroughly blend them into full depth of unamended, in-place soil to produce planting soil.

1. Mix [lime] [and] [sulfur] with dry soil before mixing fertilizer. 2. Mix fertilizer with planting soil no more than seven days before planting.

D. Compaction: Compact blended planting soil to [75 to 82] <Insert number range> percent of maximum Standard Proctor density according to ASTM D 698[ except where a different compaction value is indicated on Drawings].

E. Finish Grading: Grade planting soil to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades.

3.6 APPLYING COMPOST TO SURFACE OF PLANTING SOIL

A. Application: Apply [compost component of planting-soil mix] [4 inches (100 mm) of compost] [6 inches (150 mm) of compost] <Insert depth> to surface of in-place planting soil. Do not apply materials or till if existing soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet.

B. Finish Grading: Grade surface to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades.

3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: [Owner will engage] [Engage] a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Perform the following tests[ and inspections]:

1. Compaction: Test planting-soil compaction after placing each lift and at completion using a densitometer or soil-compaction meter calibrated to a reference test value based on laboratory testing according to ASTM D 698. Space tests at no less than one for each [1000 sq. ft. (100 sq. m)] [2000 sq. ft. (200 sq. m)] <Insert dimension> of in-place soil or part thereof.

2. <Insert name of test>: <Insert requirement>. 3. <Insert name of inspection>: <Insert requirement>.

C. Soil will be considered defective if it does not pass tests[ and inspections].

D. Prepare test[ and inspection] reports.

Page 170: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 329113 - 10 SOIL PREPARATION

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

E. Label each sample and test report with the date, location keyed to a site plan or other location system, visible conditions when and where sample was taken, and sampling depth.

3.8 PROTECTION AND CLEANING

A. Protection Zone: Identify protection zones according to Section 015639 "Temporary Tree and Plant Protection."

B. Protect areas of in-place soil from additional compaction, disturbance, and contamination. Prohibit the following practices within these areas except as required to perform planting operations:

1. Storage of construction materials, debris, or excavated material. 2. Parking vehicles or equipment. 3. Vehicle traffic. 4. Foot traffic. 5. Erection of sheds or structures. 6. Impoundment of water. 7. Excavation or other digging unless otherwise indicated.

C. Remove surplus soil and waste material including excess subsoil, unsuitable materials, trash, and debris and legally dispose of them off Owner's property unless otherwise indicated.

1. Dispose of excess subsoil and unsuitable materials on-site where directed by Owner.

END OF SECTION 329113

Page 171: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 329200 - 1 TURF AND GRASSES

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

SECTION 329200

TURF AND GRASSES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Seeding. 2. Sodding.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Pesticide: A substance or mixture intended for preventing, destroying, repelling, or mitigating a pest. This includes insecticides, miticides, herbicides, fungicides, rodenticides, and molluscicides. It also includes substances or mixtures intended for use as a plant regulator, defoliant, or desiccant.

B. Planting Soil: Existing, on-site soil; imported soil; or manufactured soil that has been modified with soil amendments and perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for plant growth. See [Section 329113 "Soil Preparation"] [Section 329115 "Soil Preparation (Performance Specification)"] and drawing designations for planting soils.

1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at [Project site] <Insert location>.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Certification of grass seed.

1. Certification of each seed mixture for turfgrass sod.

B. Product certificates.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified landscape Installer whose work has resulted in successful turf establishment.

1. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor on Project site when work is in progress.

Page 172: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 329200 - 2 TURF AND GRASSES

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

2. Personnel Certifications: Installer's field supervisor shall have certification in one of the following categories from the Professional Landcare Network:

a. Landscape Industry Certified Technician - Exterior. b. Landscape Industry Certified Lawncare Manager. c. Landscape Industry Certified Lawncare Technician.

3. Pesticide Applicator: State licensed, commercial.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Seed and Other Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened containers showing weight, certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and indication of compliance with state and Federal laws, as applicable.

B. Sod: Harvest, deliver, store, and handle sod according to requirements in "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Materials" and "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Transplanting and Installation" sections in TPI's "Guideline Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding." Deliver sod within 24 hours of harvesting and in time for planting promptly. Protect sod from breakage and drying.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SEED

A. Grass Seed: Fresh, clean, dry, new-crop seed complying with AOSA's "Rules for Testing Seeds" for purity and germination tolerances.

B. Seed Species:

1. Quality: State-certified seed of grass species as listed below for solar exposure. 2. Quality: Seed of grass species as listed below for solar exposure, with not less than [85]

<Insert number> percent germination, not less than [95] <Insert number> percent pure seed, and not more than [0.5] <Insert number> percent weed seed:

3. Full Sun: <Insert species>. 4. Sun and Partial Shade: Proportioned by weight as follows:

a. <Insert number> percent <Insert species>. b. <Insert number> percent <Insert species>. c. <Insert number> percent <Insert species>.

5. Shade: Proportioned by weight as follows:

a. <Insert number> percent <Insert species>. b. <Insert number> percent <Insert species>. c. <Insert number> percent <Insert species>.

C. Grass-Seed Mix: Proprietary seed mix as follows:

Page 173: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 329200 - 3 TURF AND GRASSES

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide the following] [provide one of the following] [available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:

a. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation>.

2.2 TURFGRASS SOD

A. Turfgrass Sod: [Certified] [Approved] [Number 1 Quality/Premium, including limitations on thatch, weeds, diseases, nematodes, and insects], complying with "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Materials" in TPI's "Guideline Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding." Furnish viable sod of uniform density, color, and texture that is strongly rooted and capable of vigorous growth and development when planted.

B. Turfgrass Species: Sod of grass species as follows:

1. Full Sun: <Insert species>. 2. Sun and Partial Shade: Proportioned by weight as follows:

a. <Insert number> percent <Insert species>. b. <Insert number> percent <Insert species>. c. <Insert number> percent <Insert species>.

3. Shade: Proportioned by weight as follows:

a. <Insert number> percent <Insert species>. b. <Insert number> percent <Insert species>. c. <Insert number> percent <Insert species>.

2.3 FERTILIZERS

A. Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of fast- and slow-release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea formaldehyde, phosphorous, and potassium in the following composition:

1. Composition: [1 lb/1000 sq. ft. (0.45 kg/92.9 sq. m)] <Insert value> of actual nitrogen, 4 percent phosphorous, and 2 percent potassium, by weight.

B. Slow-Release Fertilizer: Granular or pelleted fertilizer consisting of 50 percent water-insoluble nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium in the following composition:

1. Composition: 20 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorous, and 10 percent potassium, by weight.

Page 174: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 329200 - 4 TURF AND GRASSES

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

2.4 MULCHES

A. Straw Mulch: Provide air-dry, clean, mildew- and seed-free, salt hay or threshed straw of wheat, rye, oats, or barley.

B. Sphagnum Peat Mulch: Partially decomposed sphagnum peat moss, finely divided or of granular texture, and with a pH range of 3.4 to 4.8.

C. Muck Peat Mulch: Partially decomposed moss peat, native peat, or reed-sedge peat, finely divided or of granular texture, with a pH range of 6 to 7.5, and having a water-absorbing capacity of 1100 to 2000 percent, and containing no sand.

D. Compost Mulch: Well-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to 8; moisture content 35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing through 1-inch (25-mm)sieve; soluble salt content of [2 to 5] <Insert range or value> decisiemens/m; not exceeding 0.5 percent inert contaminants and free of substances toxic to plantings; and as follows:

2.5 PESTICIDES

A. General: Pesticide, registered and approved by the EPA, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and of type recommended by manufacturer for each specific problem and as required for Project conditions and application. Do not use restricted pesticides unless authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TURF AREA PREPARATION

A. General: Prepare planting area for soil placement and mix planting soil according to [Section 329113 "Soil Preparation."] [Section 329115 "Soil Preparation (Performance Specification)."]

B. Reduce elevation of planting soil to allow for soil thickness of sod.

C. Moisten prepared area before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface to dry before planting. Do not create muddy soil.

D. Before planting, obtain Architect's acceptance of finish grading; restore planting areas if eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading.

3.2 SEEDING

A. Sow seed with spreader or seeding machine. Do not broadcast or drop seed when wind velocity exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h).

1. Evenly distribute seed by sowing equal quantities in two directions at right angles to each other.

Page 175: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 329200 - 5 TURF AND GRASSES

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

2. Do not use wet seed or seed that is moldy or otherwise damaged. 3. Do not seed against existing trees. Limit extent of seed to outside edge of planting saucer.

B. Sow seed at a total rate of [2 lb/1000 sq. ft. (0.9 kg/92.9 sq. m)] [3 to 4 lb/1000 sq. ft. (1.4 to 1.8 kg/92.9 sq. m)] [5 to 8 lb/1000 sq. ft. (2.3 to 3.6 kg/92.9 sq. m)] <Insert values>.

C. Rake seed lightly into top 1/8 inch (3 mm) of soil, roll lightly, and water with fine spray.

D. Protect seeded areas with slopes not exceeding 1:6 by spreading straw mulch. Spread uniformly at a minimum rate of [2 tons/acre (42 kg/92.9 sq. m)] <Insert values> to form a continuous blanket [1-1/2 inches (38 mm)] <Insert dimension> in loose thickness over seeded areas.

1. Anchor straw mulch by crimping into soil with suitable mechanical equipment.

E. Protect seeded areas from hot, dry weather or drying winds by applying [compost mulch] [peat mulch] [planting soil] within 24 hours after completing seeding operations. Soak areas, scatter mulch uniformly to a thickness of [3/16 inch (4.8 mm)] <Insert dimension>, and roll surface smooth.

3.3 SODDING

A. Lay sod within 24 hours of harvesting. Do not lay sod if dormant or if ground is frozen or muddy.

B. Lay sod to form a solid mass with tightly fitted joints. Butt ends and sides of sod; do not stretch or overlap. Stagger sod strips or pads to offset joints in adjacent courses. Avoid damage to soil or sod during installation. Tamp and roll lightly to ensure contact with soil, eliminate air pockets, and form a smooth surface. Work sifted soil or fine sand into minor cracks between pieces of sod; remove excess to avoid smothering sod and adjacent grass.

1. Lay sod across slopes exceeding 1:3. 2. Anchor sod on slopes exceeding 1:6 with wood pegs or steel staples spaced as

recommended by sod manufacturer but not less than two anchors per sod strip to prevent slippage.

C. Saturate sod with fine water spray within two hours of planting. During first week after planting, water daily or more frequently as necessary to maintain moist soil to a minimum depth of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) below sod.

3.4 TURF MAINTENANCE

A. General: Maintain and establish turf by watering, fertilizing, weeding, mowing, trimming, replanting, and performing other operations as required to establish healthy, viable turf. Roll, regrade, and replant bare or eroded areas and remulch to produce a uniformly smooth turf. Provide materials and installation the same as those used in the original installation.

Page 176: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 329200 - 6 TURF AND GRASSES

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

B. Mow turf as soon as top growth is tall enough to cut. Repeat mowing to maintain specified height without cutting more than one-third of grass height. Remove no more than one-third of grass-leaf growth in initial or subsequent mowings.

3.5 SATISFACTORY TURF

A. Turf installations shall meet the following criteria as determined by Architect:

1. Satisfactory Seeded Turf: At end of maintenance period, a healthy, uniform, close stand of grass has been established, free of weeds and surface irregularities, with coverage exceeding [90 percent over any 10 sq. ft. (0.92 sq. m) and bare spots not exceeding 5 by 5 inches (125 by 125 mm)] <Insert coverage>.

2. Satisfactory Sodded Turf: At end of maintenance period, a healthy, well-rooted, even-colored, viable turf has been established, free of weeds, open joints, bare areas, and surface irregularities.

B. Use specified materials to reestablish turf that does not comply with requirements, and continue maintenance until turf is satisfactory.

END OF SECTION 329200

Page 177: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 329300 - 1 PLANTS

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

SECTION 329300

PLANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Plants. 2. Tree-watering devices. 3. Landscape edgings.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 329600 "Transplanting" for transplanting non-nursery-grown trees.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Backfill: The earth used to replace or the act of replacing earth in an excavation.

B. Pesticide: A substance or mixture intended for preventing, destroying, repelling, or mitigating a pest. Pesticides include insecticides, miticides, herbicides, fungicides, rodenticides, and molluscicides. They also include substances or mixtures intended for use as a plant regulator, defoliant, or desiccant. Some sources classify herbicides separately from pesticides.

C. Planting Soil: Existing, on-site soil; imported soil; or manufactured soil that has been modified with soil amendments and perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for plant growth. See [Section 329113 "Soil Preparation"] [Section 329115 "Soil Preparation (Performance Specification)"] for drawing designations for planting soils.

D. Root Flare: Also called "trunk flare." The area at the base of the plant's stem or trunk where the stem or trunk broadens to form roots; the area of transition between the root system and the stem or trunk.

1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at [Project site] <Insert location>.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Samples of each type of mulch.

Page 178: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 329300 - 2 PLANTS

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Product certificates.

B. Sample warranty.

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance Data: Recommended procedures to be established by Owner for maintenance of plants during a calendar year.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor on Project site when work is in progress.

1. Pesticide Applicator: State licensed, commercial.

B. Provide quality, size, genus, species, and variety of plants indicated, complying with applicable requirements in ANSI Z60.1.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver bare-root stock plants within [24 hours] [36 hours] <Insert time> of digging. Immediately after digging up bare-root stock, pack root system in wet straw, hay, or other suitable material to keep root system moist until planting. Transport in covered, temperature-controlled vehicles, and keep plants cool and protected from sun and wind at all times.

B. Do not prune trees and shrubs before delivery. Protect bark, branches, and root systems from sun scald, drying, wind burn, sweating, whipping, and other handling and tying damage. Do not bend or bind-tie trees or shrubs in such a manner as to destroy their natural shape. Provide protective covering of plants during shipping and delivery. Do not drop plants during delivery and handling.

C. Handle planting stock by root ball.

D. Store bulbs, corms, and tubers in a dry place at 60 to 65 deg F (16 to 18 deg C) until planting.

E. Deliver plants after preparations for planting have been completed, and install immediately. If planting is delayed more than six hours after delivery, set plants and trees in their appropriate aspect (sun, filtered sun, or shade), protect from weather and mechanical damage, and keep roots moist.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace plantings and accessories that fail in materials, workmanship, or growth within specified warranty period.

Page 179: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 329300 - 3 PLANTS

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Death and unsatisfactory growth, except for defects resulting from abuse, lack of adequate maintenance, or neglect by Owner.

b. Structural failures including plantings falling or blowing over.

2. Warranty Periods: From date of [planting completion] [Substantial Completion] <Insert starting time>.

a. Trees, Shrubs, Vines, and Ornamental Grasses: [12] <Insert number> months. b. Ground Covers, Biennials, Perennials, and Other Plants: [12] [Nine] [Six] [Three]

<Insert number> months. c. Annuals: [Three] [Two] <Insert number> months.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PLANT MATERIAL

A. General: Furnish nursery-grown plants true to genus, species, variety, cultivar, stem form, shearing, and other features indicated in Plant List, Plant Schedule, or Plant Legend indicated on Drawings and complying with ANSI Z60.1; and with healthy root systems developed by transplanting or root pruning. Provide well-shaped, fully branched, healthy, vigorous stock, densely foliated when in leaf and free of disease, pests, eggs, larvae, and defects such as knots, sun scald, injuries, abrasions, and disfigurement.

B. Root-Ball Depth: Furnish trees and shrubs with root balls measured from top of root ball, which begins at root flare according to ANSI Z60.1. Root flare shall be visible before planting.

C. [Annuals] [and] [Biennials]: Provide healthy, disease-free plants of species and variety shown or listed, with well-established root systems reaching to sides of the container to maintain a firm ball, but not with excessive root growth encircling the container. Provide only plants that are acclimated to outdoor conditions before delivery[ and that are in bud but not yet in bloom].

2.2 FERTILIZERS

A. Planting Tablets: Tightly compressed chip-type, long-lasting, slow-release, commercial-grade planting fertilizer in tablet form. Tablets shall break down with soil bacteria, converting nutrients into a form that can be absorbed by plant roots.

1. Size: [5-gram] [10-gram] [21-gram] <Insert size> tablets. 2. Nutrient Composition: 20 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorous, and 5 percent

potassium, by weight plus micronutrients.

Page 180: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 329300 - 4 PLANTS

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

2.3 MULCHES

A. Organic Mulch: [Shredded hardwood] [Ground or shredded bark] [Wood and bark chips] [Pine straw] [Salt hay or threshed straw] [Pine needles] [Peanut, pecan, and cocoa-bean shells] <Insert mulch type>.

B. Mineral Mulch: [Rounded riverbed gravel or smooth-faced stone] [Crushed stone or gravel] [Marble chips] [Granite chips] <Insert stone type>.

1. Size Range: [1-1/2 inches (38 mm) maximum, 3/4 inch (19 mm) minimum] [3/4 inch(19 mm) maximum, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) minimum] <Insert dimensions>.

2. Color: [Uniform tan-beige color range acceptable to Architect] [Readily available natural gravel color range] <Insert color>.

2.4 WEED-CONTROL BARRIERS

A. Nonwoven Geotextile Filter Fabric: Polypropylene or polyester fabric, 3 oz./sq. yd.(101g/sq. m) minimum, composed of fibers formed into a stable network so that fibers retain their relative position. Fabric shall be inert to biological degradation and resist naturally encountered chemicals, alkalis, and acids.

B. Composite Fabric: Woven, needle-punched polypropylene substrate bonded to a nonwoven polypropylene fabric, 4.8 oz./sq. yd. (162 g/sq. m).

2.5 PESTICIDES

A. General: Pesticide registered and approved by the EPA, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and of type recommended by manufacturer for each specific problem and as required for Project conditions and application. Do not use restricted pesticides unless authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction.

2.6 LANDSCAPE EDGINGS

A. Wood Edging: Of sizes indicated on Drawings, and wood stakes as follows:

1. Species: [Western red cedar, all heart] [Southern pine with specified wood pressure-preservative treatment].

2. Stakes: Same species as edging, 1-by-2-inch nominal (19-by-38-mm actual) by 18 inches(450 mm) long, with galvanized nails for anchoring edging.

B. Steel Edging: Standard commercial-steel edging, fabricated in sections of standard lengths, with loops stamped from or welded to face of sections to receive stakes.

1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.>

2. Edging Size: [3/16 inch (4.8 mm) thick by 4 inches (100 mm) deep] [1/4 inch (6.4 mm)thick by 5 inches (125 mm) deep] [1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick by 4 inches (100 mm)

Page 181: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 329300 - 5 PLANTS

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

deep] [1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick by 4 inches (100 mm) deep] [1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick by 6 inches (150 mm) deep] [0.1 inch (2.5 mm) thick by 4 inches (100 mm) deep] <Insert dimensions>.

3. Finish: [Manufacturer's standard paint] [Zinc coated] [Unfinished] <Insert requirement>.

C. Aluminum Edging: Standard-profile extruded-aluminum edging, ASTM B 221(ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T6, fabricated in standard lengths with interlocking sections with loops stamped from face of sections to receive stakes.

1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.>

2. Edging Size: [3/16 inch (4.8 mm) thick by 5-1/2 inches (140 mm) deep] [3/16 inch (4.8 mm) thick by 4 inches (100 mm) deep] [1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick by 5-1/2 inches (140 mm) deep] [1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick by 4 inches (100 mm) deep] <Insert dimensions>.

3. Finish: [Manufacturer's standard paint] [Powder-coat paint] [Mill (natural aluminum)] [Black anodized] <Insert requirement>.

D. Plastic Edging: Standard black polyethylene or vinyl edging, [V-lipped bottom] [horizontally grooved] <Insert configuration>, extruded in standard lengths, with 9-inch (225-mm) [steel angle] [plastic] stakes.

1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.>

2. Edging Size: [0.1 inch (2.5 mm) thick by 5 inches (125 mm) deep] [0.07 inch (1.8 mm)thick by 5 inches (125 mm) deep] <Insert dimensions>.

2.7 TREE-WATERING DEVICES

A. Slow-Release Watering Device: Standard product manufactured for drip irrigation of plants and emptying its water contents over an extended time period; manufactured from UV-light-stabilized nylon-reinforced polyethylene sheet, PVC, or HDPE plastic.

1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.>

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PLANTING AREA ESTABLISHMENT

A. General: Prepare planting area for soil placement and mix planting soil according to [Section 329113 "Soil Preparation."] [Section 329115 "Soil Preparation (Performance Specification)."]

B. Placing Planting Soil: [Place and mix planting soil in-place over exposed subgrade] [Place manufactured planting soil over exposed subgrade] [Blend planting soil in place] <Insert requirement>.

Page 182: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 329300 - 6 PLANTS

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

C. Before planting, obtain Architect's acceptance of finish grading; restore planting areas if eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading.

3.2 EXCAVATION FOR TREES AND SHRUBS

A. Planting Pits and Trenches: Excavate circular planting pits.

1. Excavate planting pits with sides sloping inward at a 45-degree angle. Excavations with vertical sides are unacceptable. Trim perimeter of bottom leaving center area of bottom raised slightly to support root ball and assist in drainage away from center. Do not further disturb base. Ensure that root ball will sit on undisturbed base soil to prevent settling. Scarify sides of planting pit smeared or smoothed during excavation.

2. Excavate approximately three times as wide as ball diameter. 3. Excavate at least 12 inches (300 mm) wider than root spread and deep enough to

accommodate vertical roots for bare-root stock. 4. Do not excavate deeper than depth of the root ball, measured from the root flare to the

bottom of the root ball.

B. Backfill Soil: Subsoil and topsoil removed from excavations [may] [may not] be used as backfill soil unless otherwise indicated.

3.3 TREE, SHRUB, AND VINE PLANTING

A. Inspection: At time of planting, verify that root flare is visible at top of root ball according to ANSI Z60.1. If root flare is not visible, remove soil in a level manner from the root ball to where the top-most root emerges from the trunk. After soil removal to expose the root flare, verify that root ball still meets size requirements.

B. Roots: Remove stem girdling roots and kinked roots. Remove injured roots by cutting cleanly; do not break.

C. Set each plant plumb and in center of planting pit or trench with root flare [1 inch (25 mm)above] [2 inches (50 mm) above] <Insert requirement> adjacent finish grades.

1. Backfill: Planting soil <Insert drawing designation>.[ For trees, use excavated soil for backfill.]

2. Balled and Burlapped Stock: After placing some backfill around root ball to stabilize plant, carefully cut and remove burlap, rope, and wire baskets from tops of root balls and from sides, but do not remove from under root balls. Remove pallets, if any, before setting. Do not use planting stock if root ball is cracked or broken before or during planting operation.

3. [Balled and Potted] [and] [Container-Grown] Stock: Carefully remove root ball from container without damaging root ball or plant.

4. Fabric Bag-Grown Stock: Carefully remove root ball from fabric bag without damaging root ball or plant. Do not use planting stock if root ball is cracked or broken before or during planting operation.

Page 183: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 329300 - 7 PLANTS

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

5. Bare-Root Stock: Support stem of each plant and spread roots without tangling or turning toward surface. Plumb before backfilling, and maintain plumb while working. Carefully work backfill around roots by hand. Bring roots into close contact with the soil.

6. Backfill around root ball in layers, tamping to settle soil and eliminate voids and air pockets. When planting pit is approximately one-half filled, water thoroughly before placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more water is absorbed.

7. Place planting tablets equally distributed around each planting pit when pit is approximately one-half filled. Place tablets beside the root ball about 1 inch (25 mm)from root tips; do not place tablets in bottom of the hole.

a. Bare-Root Stock: Place tablets beside soil-covered roots; do not place tablets touching the roots.

b. Quantity: [As indicated on Drawings] [Two per plant] [Three for each caliper inch of plant] <Insert requirement>.

8. Continue backfilling process. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of soil.

D. Slopes: When planting on slopes, set the plant so the root flare on the uphill side is flush with the surrounding soil on the slope; the edge of the root ball on the downhill side will be above the surrounding soil. Apply enough soil to cover the downhill side of the root ball.

3.4 TREE, SHRUB, AND VINE PRUNING

A. Remove only dead, dying, or broken branches. Do not prune for shape.

B. Prune, thin, and shape trees, shrubs, and vines as directed by Architect.

C. Prune, thin, and shape trees, shrubs, and vines according to standard professional horticultural and arboricultural practices. Unless otherwise indicated by Architect, do not cut tree leaders; remove only injured, dying, or dead branches from trees and shrubs; and prune to retain natural character.

D. Do not apply pruning paint to wounds.

3.5 GROUND COVER AND PLANT PLANTING

A. Set out and space ground cover and plants other than trees, shrubs, and vines [9 inches (225 mm) apart] [12 inches (300 mm) apart] [18 inches (450 mm) apart] [24 inches (600 mm)apart] [as indicated on Drawings] in even rows with triangular spacing.

B. Use planting soil <Insert drawing designation> for backfill.

C. Dig holes large enough to allow spreading of roots.

D. Work soil around roots to eliminate air pockets and leave a slight saucer indentation around plants to hold water.

E. Water thoroughly after planting, taking care not to cover plant crowns with wet soil.

Page 184: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 329300 - 8 PLANTS

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

F. Protect plants from hot sun and wind; remove protection if plants show evidence of recovery from transplanting shock.

3.6 PLANTING AREA MULCHING

A. Install weed-control barriers before mulching according to manufacturer's written instructions. Completely cover area to be mulched, overlapping edges a minimum of [6 inches (150 mm)] [12 inches (300mm)] and secure seams with galvanized pins.

B. Mulch backfilled surfaces of planting areas and other areas indicated.

1. Trees[ and Treelike Shrubs] in Turf Areas: Apply [organic] [mineral] mulch ring of [2-inch (50-mm)] [3-inch (75-mm)] <Insert dimension> average thickness, with [12-inch (300-mm)] [24-inch (600-mm)] [36-inch (900-mm)] <Insert dimension> radius around trunks or stems. Do not place mulch within [3 inches (75 mm)] [6 inches (150 mm)] <Insert distance> of trunks or stems.

2. [Organic Mulch] [and] [Mineral Mulch] in Planting Areas: Apply [2-inch (50-mm)] [3-inch (75-mm)] <Insert dimension> average thickness of organic mulch [extending 12 inches (300 mm) beyond edge of individual planting pit or trench] [and] [over whole surface of planting area], and finish level with adjacent finish grades. Do not place mulch within [3 inches (75 mm)] [6 inches (150 mm)] <Insert distance> of trunks or stems.

3.7 EDGING INSTALLATION

A. Wood Edging: Install edging where indicated.[ Mitre cut joints and connections at a 45-degree angle.] Fasten each cut joint or connection with two galvanized nails. Anchor with wood stakes spaced up to 36 inches (900 mm) apart, driven at least 1 inch (25 mm) below top elevation of edging. Use two galvanized nails per stake to fasten edging, of length as needed to penetrate both edging and stake and provide 1/2-inch (13-mm) clinch at point. Predrill stakes if needed to avoid splitting. Replace stakes that crack or split during installation process.

B. Steel Edging: Install steel edging where indicated according to manufacturer's written instructions. Anchor with steel stakes spaced approximately 30 inches (760 mm) apart, driven below top elevation of edging.

C. Aluminum Edging: Install aluminum edging where indicated according to manufacturer's written instructions. Anchor with aluminum stakes spaced approximately [36 inches (900 mm)] [48 inches (1200 mm)] apart, driven below top elevation of edging.

D. Plastic Edging: Install plastic edging where indicated according to manufacturer's written instructions. Anchor with steel stakes spaced approximately [36 inches (900 mm)] [48 inches(1200 mm)] apart, driven through upper base grooves or V-lip of edging.

E. Shovel-Cut Edging: Separate mulched areas from turf areas[, curbs, and paving] with a 45-degree, 4- to 6-inch- (100- to 150-mm-) deep, shovel-cut edge[ as indicated on Drawings].

Page 185: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 329300 - 9 PLANTS

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

3.8 INSTALLING SLOW-RELEASE WATERING DEVICE

A. Provide one device for each tree.

3.9 PLANT MAINTENANCE

A. Maintain plantings by pruning, cultivating, watering, weeding, fertilizing, mulching, restoring planting saucers, resetting to proper grades or vertical position, and performing other operations as required to establish healthy, viable plantings.

B. Fill in, as necessary, soil subsidence that may occur because of settling or other processes. Replace mulch materials damaged or lost in areas of subsidence.

C. Apply treatments as required to keep plant materials, planted areas, and soils free of pests and pathogens or disease. Use integrated pest management practices when possible to minimize use of pesticides and reduce hazards. Treatments include physical controls such as hosing off foliage, mechanical controls such as traps, and biological control agents.

D. Apply pesticides and other chemical products and biological control agents according to authorities having jurisdiction and manufacturer's written recommendations. Coordinate applications with Owner's operations and others in proximity to the Work. Notify Owner before each application is performed.

E. Protect plants from damage due to landscape operations and operations of other contractors and trades. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat, repair, or replace damaged plantings.

F. At time of Substantial Completion, verify that tree-watering devices are in good working order and leave them in place. Replace improperly functioning devices.

3.10 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Maintenance Service: Provide maintenance by skilled employees of landscape Installer. Maintain as required in "Plant Maintenance" Article. Begin maintenance immediately after plants are installed and continue until plantings are acceptably healthy and well established, but for not less than maintenance period below:

1. Maintenance Period for Trees and Shrubs: [12] [Six] [Three] months from date of [planting completion] [Substantial Completion] <Insert starting time>.

2. Maintenance Period for Ground Cover and Other Plants: [Six] [Three] months from date of [planting completion] [Substantial Completion] <Insert starting time>.

END OF SECTION 329300

Page 186: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 330500 - 1 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

SECTION 330500

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Piping joining materials. 2. Dielectric fittings. 3. Sleeves. 4. Identification devices. 5. Grout. 6. Piping system common requirements. 7. Equipment installation common requirements. 8. Concrete bases. 9. Metal supports and anchorages.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Exposed Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions.

B. Concealed Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Dielectric fittings. 2. Identification devices.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Welding certificates.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

Page 187: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 330500 - 2 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

B. Steel Piping Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping." 2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes

involved and that certification is current.

C. Comply with ASME A13.1 for lettering size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification devices.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS

A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents.

1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free, 1/8-inch (3.2-mm) maximum thickness, unless otherwise indicated.

a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges. b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.

2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full-face or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813.

E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant piping, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

G. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping:

1. ABS Piping: ASTM D 2235. 2. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493. 3. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656. 4. PVC to ABS Piping Transition: ASTM D 3138.

Page 188: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 330500 - 3 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

H. Fiberglass Pipe Adhesive: As furnished or recommended by pipe manufacturer.

2.2 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. Dielectric Fittings, General: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials or ferrous material body with separating nonconductive insulating material suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.

B. Dielectric Unions:

1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.>

2. Description: Factory fabricated, union, NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller.

a. Pressure Rating: [150 psig (1035 kPa) minimum] [250 psig (1725 kPa)] at 180 deg F (82 deg C).

b. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded ferrous.

C. Dielectric Flanges:

1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.>

2. Description: Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4(DN 65 to DN 100) and larger.

a. Pressure Rating: [150 psig (1035 kPa) minimum] [175 psig (1200 kPa)minimum] [300 psig (2070 kPa)].

b. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

D. Dielectric Couplings:

1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.>

2. Description: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining, NPS 3 (DN 80) and smaller.

a. Pressure Rating: 300 psig (2070 kPa) at 225 deg F (107 deg C). b. End Connections: Threaded.

E. Dielectric Nipples:

1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.>

2. Description: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining.

a. Pressure Rating: [300 psig (2070 kPa) at 225 deg F (107 deg C)] <Insert pressure and temperature>.

b. End Connections: Threaded or grooved.

Page 189: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 330500 - 4 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

2.3 SLEEVES

A. Mechanical sleeve seals for pipe penetrations are specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

B. Galvanized-Steel Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch (0.6-mm) minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.

C. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.

D. Cast-Iron Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Molded PVC Sleeves: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

F. PVC Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.

G. Molded PE Sleeves: Reusable, PE, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth outer surface with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

2.4 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES

A. Equipment Nameplates: Metal permanently fastened to equipment with data engraved or stamped.

1. Data: Manufacturer, product name, model number, serial number, capacity, operating and power characteristics, labels of tested compliances, and essential data.

2. Location: Accessible and visible.

B. Snap-on Plastic Pipe Markers: Manufacturer's standard preprinted, semirigid, snap-on type. Include color-coding according to ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Pressure-Sensitive Pipe Markers: Manufacturer's standard preprinted, color-coded, pressure-sensitive-vinyl type with permanent adhesive.

D. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches (150 mm): Full-band pipe markers, extending 360 degrees around pipe at each location.

E. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches (150 mm) and Larger: Either full-band or strip-type pipe markers, at least three times letter height and of length required for label.

F. Lettering: Use piping system terms indicated and abbreviate only as necessary for each application length.

1. Arrows: Either integrally with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions of flow, or as separate unit on each pipe marker to indicate direction of flow.

G. Plastic Tape: Manufacturer's standard color-coded, pressure-sensitive, self-adhesive vinyl tape, at least 3 mils (0.08 mm) thick.

Page 190: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 330500 - 5 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

1. Width: 1-1/2 inches (40 mm) on pipes with OD, including insulation, less than 6 inches(150 mm); 2-1/2 inches (65 mm) for larger pipes.

2. Color: Comply with ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated.

H. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2-inch (13-mm) sequenced numbers. Include 5/32-inch (4-mm) hole for fastener.

1. Material: 0.032-inch- (0.8-mm-) thick, [polished brass] [or] [aluminum]. 2. Material: 0.0375-inch- (1-mm-) thick stainless steel. 3. Material: 3/32-inch- (2.4-mm-) thick plastic laminate with 2 black surfaces and a white

inner layer. 4. Material: Valve manufacturer's standard solid plastic. 5. Size: 1-1/2 inches (40 mm) in diameter, unless otherwise indicated. 6. Shape: As indicated for each piping system.

I. Valve Tag Fasteners: Brass, wire-link or beaded chain; or brass S-hooks.

J. Engraved Plastic-Laminate Signs: ASTM D 709, Type I, cellulose, paper-base, phenolic-resin-laminate engraving stock; Grade ES-2, black surface, black phenolic core, with white melamine subcore, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate in sizes required for message. Provide holes for mechanical fastening.

1. Engraving: Engraver's standard letter style, of sizes and with terms to match equipment identification.

2. Thickness: [1/16 inch (1.6 mm)] [1/8 inch (3 mm)], unless otherwise indicated. 3. Thickness: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), for units up to 20 sq. in. (130 sq. cm) or 8 inches (200

mm) in length, and 1/8 inch (3 mm) for larger units. 4. Fasteners: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or contact-type permanent adhesive.

K. Plastic Equipment Markers: Manufacturer's standard laminated plastic, in the following color codes:

1. Green: Cooling equipment and components. 2. Yellow: Heating equipment and components. 3. Brown: Energy reclamation equipment and components. 4. Blue: Equipment and components that do not meet criteria above. 5. Hazardous Equipment: Use colors and designs recommended by ASME A13.1. 6. Terminology: Match schedules as closely as possible. Include the following:

a. Name and plan number. b. Equipment service. c. Design capacity. d. Other design parameters such as pressure drop, entering and leaving conditions,

and speed.

7. Size: 2-1/2 by 4 inches (65 by 100 mm) for control devices, dampers, and valves; 4-1/2 by 6 inches (115 by 150 mm) for equipment.

Page 191: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 330500 - 6 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

2.5 GROUT

A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout.

1. Characteristics: Post hardening, volume adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.

2. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength. 3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DIELECTRIC FITTING APPLICATIONS

A. Dry Piping Systems: Connect piping of dissimilar metals with the following:

1. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Dielectric unions. 2. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Dielectric flanges.

B. Wet Piping Systems: Connect piping of dissimilar metals with the following:

1. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Dielectric couplings or dielectric nipples. 2. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Dielectric nipples.

3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Install piping according to the following requirements and utilities Sections specifying piping systems.

B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on the Coordination Drawings.

C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

D. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

E. Install piping at indicated slopes.

F. Install piping free of sags and bends.

G. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

H. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

Page 192: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 330500 - 7 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

I. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.

J. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves.

K. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete floor and roof slabs.

1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.

a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of equipment areas or other wet areas [2 inches (50 mm)] <Insert dimension> above finished floor level.

2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed.

a. [PVC] [Steel] Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6 (DN 150). b. Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 (DN 150) and larger, penetrating gypsum-

board partitions.

L. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

M. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections for roughing-in requirements.

3.3 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and utilities Sections specifying piping systems.

B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

D. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified.

2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

E. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M, using qualified processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.

F. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.

G. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with grooved-end pipe coupling with coupling housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts according to coupling and fitting manufacturer's written instructions.

Page 193: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 330500 - 8 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

H. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813 water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy (0.20 percent maximum lead content) complying with ASTM B 32.

I. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.

J. Pressure-Sealed Joints: Assemble joints for plain-end copper tube and mechanical pressure seal fitting with proprietary crimping tool to according to fitting manufacturer's written instructions.

K. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cemented Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following:

1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements.

2. ABS Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661 appendixes. 3. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix. 4. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket

fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-number PVC pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855.

5. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855. 6. PVC to ABS Nonpressure Transition Fittings: Join according to ASTM D 3138

Appendix.

L. Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3139.

M. Plastic Nonpressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3212.

N. Plastic Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657.

1. Plain-End PE Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion. 2. Plain-End PE Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.

O. Bonded Joints: Prepare pipe ends and fittings, apply adhesive, and join according to pipe manufacturer's written instructions.

3.4 PIPING CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

3. Install dielectric fittings at connections of dissimilar metal pipes.

Page 194: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 330500 - 9 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

3.5 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. Install equipment level and plumb, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Install equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference with other installations. Extend grease fittings to an accessible location.

C. Install equipment to allow right of way to piping systems installed at required slope.

3.6 IDENTIFICATION

A. Piping Systems: Install pipe markers on each system. Include arrows showing normal direction of flow.

1. Plastic markers, with application systems. Install on insulation segment if required for hot noninsulated piping.

2. Locate pipe markers on exposed piping according to the following:

a. Near each valve and control device. b. Near each branch, excluding short takeoffs for equipment and terminal units. Mark

each pipe at branch if flow pattern is not obvious. c. Near locations where pipes pass through walls or floors or enter inaccessible

enclosures. d. At manholes and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping. e. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.

B. Equipment: Install engraved plastic-laminate sign or equipment marker on or near each major item of equipment.

1. Lettering Size: Minimum 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) high for name of unit if viewing distance is less than 24 inches (610 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) high for distances up to 72 inches (1800 mm), and proportionately larger lettering for greater distances. Provide secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths of size of principal lettering.

2. Text of Signs: Provide name of identified unit. Include text to distinguish among multiple units, inform user of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations.

C. Adjusting: Relocate identifying devices that become visually blocked by work of this or other Divisions.

3.7 CONCRETE BASES

A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturer's written instructions and according to seismic codes at Project.

1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches (100 mm)larger in both directions than supported unit.

Page 195: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 330500 - 10 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around the full perimeter of base.

3. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete floor.

4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 6. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions. 7. Use [3000-psi (20.7-MPa)] <Insert strength>, 28-day compressive-strength concrete

and reinforcement as specified in [Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."] [Section 033053 "Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Concrete."]

3.8 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES

A. Refer to Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel.

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor piped utility materials and equipment.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

3.9 GROUTING

A. Mix and install grout for equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors.

B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.

C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.

D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.

E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.

F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.

G. Place grout around anchors.

H. Cure placed grout.

END OF SECTION 330500

Page 196: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 341713 - 1 VEHICLE BARRIERS

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

SECTION 341713

VEHICLE BARRIERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes pipe bollard covers. B. Section includes breakaway pipe bollards

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPE BOLLARD COVERS

A. Manufacturer:

1. Basis of Design: Post Guard polyethylene plastic pipe sleeves for steel pipe bollards. Manufactured by Encore Commercial Products, Inc.

2. Contact: Encore Commercial Products, Inc.

a. Contact: Customer Service 24370 Northwestern Hwy. Suite 250 Southfield, MI 48075 1-866-737-8900; 248-354-4090; Fax: 248-354-4095; website: www.postguard.com. Manufactured in the United States of America.

B. Performance Requirements:

1. High molecular weight material. Designed for optimum balance of density, molecular weight and molecular weight distribution demonstrating maximum property advantages for large products that require high impact resistance.

2. Ultraviolet Protection Additive. Five (5) Year UV stabilizer package. Warranty 5 Years. 3. Thickness Nominal wall thickness will be 0.125 inch. 4. Anti Static Package. Combined in manufacturing process of HDPE. 5. Abrasion Resistant. 6. Environmental Stress Cracks Resistant. 7. Reflective Tape: Each Post Guard has 2 strips of 3M Series Reflective tape recessed on

the part 5.875 inches apart. 8. Flexural Modulus: 200,000 psi.

Page 197: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 341713 - 2 VEHICLE BARRIERS

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

9. Tensile Strength: 4,000psiMaterials.

C. Materials:

1. HDPE Polyethylene. 2. Size 4.5” Diameter by 48” H. 3. Color: As selected by Architect from manufactures standard colors. 4. Tape color is White.

2.2 BREAKAWAY PIPE BOLLARDS

1. Basis of Design: (HDPE) High density plastic polyethylene Post Guard Gorilla Post. Manufactured by Encore Commercial Products, Inc. Temporary to Permanent Bollard with spring base.

2. Contact: Encore Commercial Products, Inc.

a. Contact: Customer Service 24370 Northwestern Hwy. Suite 250 Southfield, MI 48075 1-866-737-8900; 248-354-4090; Fax: 248-354-4095; website: www.postguard.com. Manufactured in the United States of America.

B. Performance Requirements:

1. High molecular weight material. 2. Magnetic Pulling Power 380 psi Vertical Lift 275 psi 45° lift. 3. Cement Surface. 4. Magnetic Mounting System – Cement Surface 5. Mounting Plate Conforms to ADA compliance. 6. Removal Tool.

C. Materials:

1. HDPE Polyethylene Post Guard Cover. 2. Size 4.5” Diameter by 48” H. 3. Color: As selected by Architect from manufactures standard colors. 4. Tape color is White. 5. Concrete Mounting Base with six Rare Earth Neodymium Magnets. 5.5” diameter

galvanized 1/16” thick. Conforms to ADA trip hazard regulation. 6. Epoxy. HIT-RE 500 two-part adhesive Hilti epoxy. 7. Removal Tool. Used to break magnetic hold between base plate and bottom magnet.

Hand Held.

Page 198: FIRST BANK NEW FACILITY · 2018. 5. 29. · 312000 earth moving 313116 termite control division 32 – exterior improvements 321216 asphalt paving 321313 concrete paving 321373 paving

Section 341713 - 3 VEHICLE BARRIERS

Project A17012

MAY 8, 2018

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION – PIPE BOLLARD COVERS

A. Verify the steel pipe cores are set true, correctly aligned and well anchored in below grade concrete encasement.

B. Fill Cores with concrete and strike level across the top of pipe.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install pipe bollard covers and breakaway pipe bollards according to manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise indicated.

END OF SECTION 341713


Recommended